Department of Electronic and Information Engineering
Bachelor of Science (Honours) Degree Programme in
Internet and Multimedia Technologies
Full-time Credit-based
Code: 42077
Programme Booklet
2011/2012 BSC(HONS) IN INTERNET AND MULTIMEDIA TECHNOLOGIES (FULL-TIME/SANDWICH/ COOPERATIVE EDUCATION SCHEME)
Contents Page
1. General Information 1
2. Rationale, Aims and Intended Learning Outcomes of the Programme 2
3. Entrance Requirements 5
4. Programme, Subjects, and Credits 7
5. Mode of Study and Framework 16
6. Honours Project 22
7. Practical Training 23
8. Work-Integrated Education (WIE) 23
9. Co-curricular Activities 27
10. Departmental Undergraduate Programme Committee 28
11. “Regular” Student, “Self-Paced” Student, and Student Status 29
12. Subject Registration (Including Add / Drop / Withdrawal of Subjects) 30
13. Zero Subject Enrolment 31
14. Subject Exemption 31
15. Credit Transfer 32
16. Deferment of Study 34
17. Principles of Assessment 34
18. Assessment Methods 35
19. Assessment Results 36
20. Board of Examiners (BoE) 36
21. Progression / Academic Probation / Deregistration 37
22. Appeal against Assessment Results 38
23. Retaking of Subjects 38
24. Exceptional Circumstances 39
25. Grading 41
26. Eligibility for Award 43
27. Guidelines for Award Classification 44
Page
28. Major in Internet and Multimedia Technologies 46
29. Curriculum Map 51
30. SYLLABI
LEVEL 1
ABCT102 Foundation Biology 53
ABCT103 Fundamental Chemistry 55
AF1603 Foundations of Economics 57
AMA103 Foundation Mathematics I for Science and Engineering 59
AMA104 Foundation Mathematics II for Science and Engineering 61
AMA105 Logic: Qualitative and Quantitative 63
AMA106 Foundation Mathematics 66
AP101 College Physics I 68
AP102 College Physics II 70
APSS184 Understanding the Hong Kong Community 72
APSS185 Discovering Psychology 74
COMP100 Introduction to Information Technology 76
COMP102 Enterprise Information Technology 78
COMP111 Information Technology Systems 80
ELC1003 Extended Writing Skills 82
ELC1004 English for University Studies I 84
ELC1005 English for University Studies II 86
ENG1001 Foundation Year Seminar I 88
ENG1002 Foundation Year Seminar II 90
ITC1001 Design and Applied Technology 92
LEVEL 2
AMA227 Mathematics I 94
AMA228 Mathematics II 96
CBS2050 Elementary Cantonese 98
CBS2080 Fundamentals of Chinese Communication 100
EIE210 Electronics Design 102
Page
EIE214 Introduction to Logic Design 106
EIE226 Introduction to Databases 110
ELC2501 University English I 113
ELC2502 University English II 116
ENG224 Information Technology 119
ENG236 Computer Programming 122
GEC225 Exploration of the Cosmos 125
GEC270 History of Hong Kong 128
IC291 Practical Training 132
MM2021 Management and Organisation 136
MM2711 Introduction to Marketing 140
SD2492 Product Design and Social Considerations 143
LEVEL 3
EIE320 Object-Oriented Design and Programming 146
EIE328 Digital Signal Processing for Multimedia Applications 151
EIE341 Signals and Systems 155
EIE342 Computer Networks 158
EIE343 Computer System Principles 162
EIE345 Data Communication Technologies 166
EIE360 Integrated Project 170
EIE3109 Mobile Systems and Application Development 174
ELC3508 English for Effective Workplace Communication 177
SD348 Introduction to Industrial Design 180
SD3983 Computer Game Development II 183
SD3984 Computer Game Development I 186
LEVEL 4
COMP407 Computer Graphics 189
COMP436 Middleware and Distributed Objects 192
COMP437 Mobile Computing 195
Page
EIE408 Principles of Virtual Reality 198
EIE414 Computer Architecture and Systems 203
EIE424 Distributed Systems and Network Programming 207
EIE426 Artificial Intelligence and Computer Vision 212
EIE428 Multimedia Communications 217
EIE429 Corporate Networking 221
EIE430 Honours Project 226
EIE431 Digital Video Production and Broadcasting 229
EIE432 Web Systems and Technologies 233
EIE435 Image and Audio Processing 237
Level 5 EIE subject syllabi are obtainable from the "Handbook of Postgraduate Scheme in Engineering" available from the EIE General Office or downloadable from the MSc/PgD Programme webpage http://www.eie.polyu.edu.hk/prog/msc/msc5.htm.
This Programme Booklet is subject to review and changes which the Department can decide to make from time to time. Students will be informed of the changes as and when appropriate.
Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
1. GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1 Cohort of Intakes
This programme booklet is the definitive programme document for the 2011/12 cohort, and particularly for those students who enter this programme by following the HKALE system. It is also the definitive programme document for those non-local students from Chinese Mainland or countries which have an education system different from the current Hong Kong system who entered this programme in 2010/11. These non- local students are required to study a one-year Foundation Curriculum on top of the normal requirements for a 3-year undergraduate degree programme as specified in this programme booklet. They are required to complete a total of 132 credits, within 4 years nominal, to attain the degree award. In addition to this programme booklet, these students should refer to the Foundation-Year Curriculum, which is specially designed and approved by the University Senate. Just in case any updated information is necessary after the publication of this booklet, students are requested to refer to the URL http://www.eie.polyu.edu.hk/prog/bsc.html for the most updated information. Should any discrepancies between the contents of the booklet and University regulations arise, University regulations always prevail.
1.2 Programme Information
Title of Programme Bachelor of Science (Honours) Degree in Internet and Multimedia Technologies
Host Department Department of Electronic and Information Engineering (EIE)
Programme Structure Credit-based
Final Award BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies 互聯網及多媒體科技﹝榮譽﹞理學士
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
1 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
Modes of attendance and total credits for graduation
For students who enter this programme by following a local Advanced-level education system:
Mode of Attendance Full-time/Sandwich/Cooperative Education Scheme
Duration Full-time mode: 3 years nominal, 6 years maximum
Sandwich mode: 4 years nominal, 7 years maximum
Cooperative Education Scheme (CES) mode: 3½ years nominal, 7 years maximum
Total Credits for 100 Graduation (plus 5 practical training credits and a minimum of 1 Work-Integrated Education training credit)
For students who are required to study the Foundation-Year Curriculum:
Mode of Attendance Full-time/Sandwich/Cooperative Education Scheme
Duration Full-time mode: 4 years nominal, 8 years maximum
Sandwich mode: 5 years nominal, 8 years maximum
Cooperative Education Scheme (CES) mode: 4½ years nominal, 8 years maximum
Total Credits for 132 Graduation (plus 5 practical training credits and a minimum of 1 Work-Integrated Education training credit)
2. RATIONALE, AIMS AND INTENDED LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE PROGRAMME
2.1 Rationale and Aims
Internet and multimedia technologies are among the key technologies that support the economic growth worldwide. Products with multimedia features such as digital audio-visual gadgets and smart mobile devices are in great demand and new models are being developed almost every day. Moreover, with the increasing popularity of wired and wireless broadband communications, more and more multimedia contents are being created, delivered and shared among users via the Internet. In the years to come, there will be a rapid convergence of computer, communications and consumer electronics. There will also be a need of professionals who possess knowledge in all three areas of computer networks, multimedia and information technologies. The Programme primarily aims to produce graduates that will fulfil such a need by
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
2 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
providing sufficient technical training to students for a career in the field of Internet and multimedia technologies. Moreover, the Programme aims to develop all-round students to adapt to the rapidly changing environment. All students will also acquire some form of work-integrated education before graduation.
Specifically, the Programme is designed to equip students with . the necessary practical skills in the application of Internet and multimedia technologies through hands-on experience and industrial placements; . an in-depth and up-to-date knowledge of Internet and multimedia technologies; . the skills to evolve into self-learners who have the necessary foundation to continue to update their expertise; . fundamental theory and practical skills adaptable to a workplace environment; . analytical thinking, problem solving, interpersonal and communication skills; . the ability to develop as creative learners who can work with abstract ideas and implement them in a practical environment; and . the necessary knowledge and skills to enable them to function in a variety of professional roles.
Upon graduation, students should have acquired sufficient knowledge to commence their careers in the following areas: . Digital entertainment industry – designing computer games, creating digital effects for movies, planning, installing, configuring and maintaining digital broadcasting equipment. . Internet-related business – developing applications with multimedia features on networks, particularly on the Internet. . Data network centres – planning, installing, configuring and maintaining general computer networks. . Mobile communications and computing – developing applications particularly for the current and future mobile systems that involve much multimedia contents, such as mobile games, mobile video streaming systems, and mobile information systems.
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
3 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
2.2 Intended Learning Outcomes of the Programme*
Programme Outcomes are the attributes of the graduates who have completed the Programme successfully. These qualities are classified into two broad categories. Category A embraces such attributes as knowledge, skills, abilities, attitudes that are related to Internet and multimedia technologies. Category B embraces all- roundedness attributes possessed by the graduates to support their further development as a person.
Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills
On successful completion of the Programme, students should be able to: 1. identify the different aspects of Internet and multimedia systems; 2. design, develop and implement digital systems related to Internet and multimedia technologies; 3. identify, analyze and solve technical problems related to Internet and multimedia technologies; 4. apply computer programming techniques to solve related practical problems; 5. apply knowledge of mathematics and science appropriate to the problems related to Internet and multimedia technologies; 6. appreciate and identify factors/issues related to product/industrial design; 7. appreciate computer games’ designs and complexities; and design, analyze, implement and evaluate computer games; and 8. appreciate and apply knowledge of information technologies.
Category B: Attributes for All-Roundedness
On successful completion of the Programme, students should be able to: 9. communicate effectively, and present ideas and findings clearly in oral and written forms; 10. understand the creative process; 11. demonstrate self-learning and life-long learning capability; 12. collaborate effectively with other members in a team, and demonstrate leadership capability; and 13. recognize social responsibility and ethics.
* The University aspires to develop all its students as all-round graduates with professional competence, and has identified a set of highly valued graduate attributes as the learning goals for students. While many of these graduate attributes can be developed through the curricular activities of this programme, some (including interest in
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
4 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
local and international affairs, interpersonal skills, sense of social and national responsibility, cultural appreciation, biliteracy and trilingualism, and entrepreneurship) will be primarily addressed through co-curricular activities offered by faculties, departments, and various teaching and learning support units of the University. Students are encouraged to make full use of such opportunities to develop these attributes.
3. ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS
For non-local students who enter this programme by following a different education system than that in Hong Kong, they must possess the non-local qualifications for meeting the general entrance requirements for Bachelor Degree Programmes as published by the University.
For students who enter this programme by following a local Advanced-level education system, they must satisfy both the University general minimum entrance requirements AND the programme-specific requirements, as set out below.
3.1 University General Minimum Entrance Requirements
For those applying on the basis of HKALE:
. E in HKALE Chinese Literature, or E in HKALE(AS-Level) Chinese Language & Culture, or (for applicants who have not taken Chinese since Secondary Five) D in a HKCEE language other than Chinese and English; AND . E in HKALE(AS-Level) Use of English; AND . E in two other HKALE subjects, or E in one other HKALE subject and two other HKALE(AS-Level) subjects; AND . E in five HKCEE subjects (For attempts of English Language and Chinese Language in 2007 and after, at least Level 2 is required).
For those applying on the basis of other local qualifications:
. An appropriate Higher Certificate (as specified in section 3.2 below) from The Hong Kong Polytechnic University or the Hong Kong Institute of Vocational Education (IVE) – formerly the Hong Kong Technical Institute (TI) and the Hong Kong Technical College (TC); OR . An appropriate Diploma (as specified in section 3.2 below) from The Hong Kong Polytechnic University or the Hong Kong Institute of Vocational Education (IVE) – formerly the Hong Kong Technical Institute (TI) and the Hong Kong Technical
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
5 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
College (TC), either with a Credit or Pass at Merit Level in at least three Level III subjects; OR . An appropriate Associate Degree/Higher Diploma* from a recognised institution (suitable candidates will be considered for advanced standing entry to the senior year curriculum).
* These applicants should follow the regular application arrangements to submit their applications. The Department will consider the applicants for admission to the senior year and inform them at the time of offer.
3.2 Programme-specific Minimum Entrance Requirements
In addition to the above general requirements, applicants must also satisfy the following programme-specific requirements:
. E in HKALE Pure Mathematics or Applied Mathematics; OR E in HKALE(AS-Level) Applied Mathematics or Mathematics & Statistics; OR C in HKCEE Mathematics or Additional Mathematics; AND . E in HKALE Physics or Engineering Science; OR E in HKALE(AS-Level) Physics; OR D in HKCEE Physics or Engineering Science.
Alternative Entry Route:
. A Higher Diploma in related disciplines; OR . A Higher Certificate in related disciplines; OR . A Diploma (with Credit) in related disciplines; OR . An Associate Degree in related disciplines.
Alternative Entry Route with Credit Transfer:
. Holders of Associate Degree/Higher Diploma in related disciplines may be given credit transfer.
3.3 Admission of Advanced Standing Students Based on Advanced Academic Qualifications
(i) With approval by the Faculty, students may be admitted to the Programme beyond the initial stage provided they have demonstrably reached the
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
6 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
general level of educational development which would have been reached had they taken the earlier stage(s) of the Programme, and provided that there is a high probability that they will complete the Programme successfully. These students will still be labelled as first year students even though they are following the curriculum of a later stage.
(ii) Students admitted to the Programme via the above-stated admission route will be advised that based on advanced academic qualifications, they are required to take fewer subjects (normally 33 credits) than students admitted through normal entry route.
(iii) Information on the number of credits required for completion for both normal entry and for the individual students based on their admission qualifications will be reflected on transcripts of study.
(iv) If students who are admitted to the programme via the above-mentioned admission routes wish to gain higher grades by studying the subject(s) again, they may approach the Department for declining the provision of taking fewer credits (which is granted at the time of admission).
(v) Students who, upon admission, wish to apply to transfer any credits from their previous studies and take fewer credits than that confirmed at the time of admission, will have to follow the arrangements for "application for credit transfer" and to pay the related fees. The credits to be transferred are subject to the rule on validity period for subject credits.
4. PROGRAMME, SUBJECTS, AND CREDITS
4.1 Programme Specified Subjects
For those non-local students from Chinese Mainland or countries which have an education system different from the current Hong Kong system, they have to study the Foundation Year prior to studying the Year 1, Year 2 and Year 3 curricula. For the details of Foundation Year subjects and credits requirements, they shall refer to the 2010/11 Foundation-Year Curriculum (a separate booklet).
For students who enter the programme via the local HKALE system or similar, they will study the subjects in Year 1, Year 2 and Year 3 as described in the following.
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
7 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
This Programme is a credit-based, 3-year full-time course. The number of credits required for graduation is 100, plus 5 practical training credits and 1 WIE training credit. At the end of Year 2, students may take the Industrial Training lasting normally for one year before they commence their final year of studies; or they may opt for the Cooperative Education Scheme (CES) in which they will engage in industrial training while concurrently pursuing study in the University until graduation.
All subjects in the first two years of studies in the Programme are compulsory and they aim to provide a solid foundation to students. During the first year of studies, moreover, students are required to complete a 5-week practical training at Industrial Centre. The practical training consists of two parts: Computer Training and Electronic Practice. The two weeks’ computer training will be completed by the end of the second semester while the three weeks’ electronic practice will be conducted during the summer.
During the final year of studies, students will be allowed to select 5 electives from a pool of subjects according to their own interest. Also, they must complete an Honours Project. In addition, students will take compulsory subjects on marketing and management, and one Broadening General Education non-technical elective subject (another General Education subject “China Studies”, which is compulsory, is to be taken in Year 1). The objectives of taking such “non-technical” subjects are to broaden the knowledge base of students and to enhance the all-roundedness of students. Before graduation, students must obtain a minimum of 1 training credit on Work-Integrated Education (WIE), which can be in the form of CES, industrial training, industrial project, Preferred Graduate Development Programme (PGDP), or jobs as deemed appropriate.
Table 4.1 Compulsory and elective subjects to be taken by regular IMT and major in IMT students
Subject Regular Major Subject Title CR Code IMT In IMT AMA227 Mathematics I 3 COM COM AMA228 Mathematics II 3 COM COM CBS2080 Fundamentals of Chinese Communication 3 CBS CBS COMP407 Computer Graphics 3 COM ELE COMP436 Middleware and Distributed Objects 3 ELE ELE COMP437 Mobile Computing 3 ELE ELE EIE210 Electronics Design 3 COM COM EIE214 Introduction to Logic Design 3 COM COM EIE226 Introduction to Databases 3 COM COM EIE320 Object-Oriented Design and Programming 3 COM COM
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
8 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
Subject Regular Major Subject Title CR Code IMT In IMT EIE328 Digital Signal Processing for Multimedia Applications 3 COM ELE EIE341 Signals and Systems 3 COM COM EIE342 Computer Networks 3 COM COM EIE343 Computer System Principles 3 COM COM EIE345 Data Communication Technologies 3 COM COM EIE360 Integrated Project 3 COM COM EIE387 Cooperative Education (for CES mode only) 0 WIE N/A EIE388 Industrial Training (for Sandwich mode only) 0 WIE WIE EIE3109 Mobile Systems and Application Development 3 COM ELE EIE408 Principles of Virtual Reality 3 ELE ELE EIE414 Computer Architecture and Systems 3 ELE ELE EIE424 Distributed Systems and Network Programming 3 ELE ELE EIE426 Artificial Intelligence and Computer Vision 3 ELE ELE EIE428 Multimedia Communications 3 ELE ELE EIE429 Corporate Networking 3 ELE ELE EIE430 Honours Project 6 COM ELE EIE431 Digital Video Production and Broadcasting 3 ELE ELE EIE432 Web Systems and Technologies 3 ELE ELE EIE435 Image and Audio Processing 3 ELE ELE ELC2501 University English I 2 ELC ELC ELC2502 University English II 2 ELC ELC ELC3508 English for Effective Workplace Communication 2 ELC ELC ENG224 Information Technology 3 COM COM ENG236 Computer Programming 3 COM COM GE General Education Subject – China Studies* 2 GE GE GE General Education Subject – Broadening* 2 GE GE IC291 Practical Training 5 TRN TRN MM2021 Management and Organisation 3 COM COM MM2711 Introduction to Marketing 3 COM COM SD2492 Product Design and Social Considerations 3 COM COM SD348 Introduction to Industrial Design 3 COM ELE SD3983 Computer Game Development II 3 COM ELE SD3984 Computer Game Development I 3 COM COM
* For details about GE subject syllabi, please refer to the brochures “China Studies Brochure” and “Broadening Subjects Brochure” published by the University.
4.2 University Language Requirements
4.2.1 Students are expected to possess the general standard of language proficiency through the secondary school education prior to their admission to the University as follows:
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
9 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
(i) English and Written Chinese
Students with overall grade “A” or “B” in HKALE(AS-level) Use of English and Chinese Language & Culture shall be considered as possessing the respective general standards of language proficiency, and thus shall be exempted from taking the respective Language Enhancement Programmes (LEP).
Students with overall grade “C” in HKALE(AS-level) Use of English and Chinese Language & Culture shall generally be considered as possessing the respective general standards of language proficiency. But if they possess component grade(s) lower than “C”, they shall be required to complete the respective LEP modules prescribed for them.
(ii) Putonghua
Students shall be assessed through the entrance test on Putonghua provided by CBS upon commencement of their programme of study at the University to determine if they shall be required to take the Putonghua LEP.
Students with grade “A” or “B” in HKCEE Putonghua shall be considered as possessing the general standard of Putonghua proficiency, and thus shall be exempted from taking the required Putonghua LEP.
Students with grade “C” in HKCEE Putonghua shall generally be considered as possessing the general standard of Putonghua proficiency. But they will be assessed again through the entrance test on Putonghua provided by CBS upon commencement of their programme of study to determine if they shall be required to take the Putonghua LEP.
4.2.2 Benchmarking mechanisms will be established for assessing students’ general standard of language proficiency upon admission, in order that appropriate enhancement can be provided, where necessary, to help them achieve the desired standard upon graduation.
(i) English and Written Chinese
HKALE(AS-level) Use of English and Chinese Language & Culture subjects shall be adopted as the benchmarking mechanisms.
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
10 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
Native speakers of English shall by default be given exemption. Exemption requests on other grounds shall be considered on a case-by-case basis.
(ii) Putonghua
CBS’s entrance test on Putonghua and HKCEE Putonghua subject shall be adopted as the benchmarking mechanisms for assessing students’ general levels of Putonghua proficiency upon admission. Native speakers of Putonghua shall by default be given exemption. Exemption requests on other grounds shall be considered on a case-by-case basis.
4.2.3 To enable students to be equipped with the necessary generic language skills to pursue their studies as well as to attain the level of proficiency up to University’s desired standard, appropriate non-credit bearing enhancement programmes will be provided to students in accordance with their proficiency level as identified in the entry assessment as specified in Section 4.2.1 above.
(i) Non-credit Bearing Language Enhancement Programmes
Non-credit bearing Chinese/English Language Enhancement Programmes (LEPs) shall be prescribed and provided by CBS/ELC for individual students in respect of their proficiency levels.
Students are expected to complete the LEPs prescribed by CBS and/or ELC before their graduation. Nevertheless, non-completion of the respective LEP(s) will not affect students' eligibility for graduation.
4.2.4 Some undergraduate students will be required to undergo both Chinese and English language proficiency assessment before their graduation*. In addition, final year students are strongly recommended to take external tests such as IELTS which can help to strengthen their credentials when seeking employment.
(i) Chinese and English Language Proficiency Assessments*
The PolyU-developed Graduating Students’ Language Proficiency Assessment (GSLPA) in Chinese and English shall be adopted as the required language proficiency exit tests.
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
11 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
Some students on UGC-funded Bachelor’s degree programmes shall be required to sit for both GSLPAs before they are eligible for graduation*.
Students who have been waived of the Chinese language requirement during their admission to the University shall be given exemption from sitting for the Chinese GSLPA (both written Chinese and Putonghua). Nevertheless, they will not be precluded from sitting for the Chinese GSLPA, but this will entirely be on a voluntary basis.
A statement indicating that a student has completed the GSLPAs shall be included in his/her academic transcript. As regards the student’s scores obtained from the GSLPAs, they shall be reported in separate test result transcripts.
* The mandatory requirements for GSLPA are only applicable to students admitted to 3-year full-time Bachelor's degree programmes in 2010/11 or before and will be abolished with effect from the 2011/12 cohort of intakes, including students on Foundation Year programmes in 2010/11 who progress to Stage 1 of FT undergraduate degree programmes in 2011/12. However, students admitted to Senior Years in 2011/12 either on advanced standing or under the Senior Year quota are required to take GSLPA before graduation.
4.3 Specified Progression Pattern
For non-local students from Chinese Mainland or countries which have an education system different from the current Hong Kong system entering this programme in 2010/11, they should have studied the Foundation Year prior to pursuing study in Year 1, Year 2 and Year 3. The progression pattern of the Foundation Year is reproduced in the following from the 2010/11 Foundation-Year Curriculum for completeness of this document. For details, please refer to the original booklet#.
Foundation Year — Semester 1
AMA103 Foundation Mathematics I for Science and 3 credits Compulsory Engineering AP101 College Physics I 3 credits Compulsory APSS184 Understanding the Hong Kong Community 3 credits Compulsory CBS2050 Elementary Cantonese 3 credits Compulsory ELC1004 English for University Studies I 3 credits Compulsory ENG1001 Foundation Year Seminar I 1 credit Compulsory
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
12 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
Foundation Year — Semester 2
AMA104 Foundation Mathematics II for Science and 3 credits Compulsory Engineering AMA105 Logic : Qualitative and Quantitative 3 credits Compulsory ELC1005 English for University Studies II 3 credits Compulsory ENG1002 Foundation Year Seminar II 1 credit Compulsory Level 1 Foundation Year Elective 3 credits Compulsory Level 1 Foundation Year Elective 3 credits Compulsory
Foundation Year Electives ABCT102 Foundation Biology ABCT103 Fundamental Chemistry* AF1603 Foundations of Economics* AP102 College Physics II APSS185 Discovering Psychology* COMP100 Introduction to Information Technology* COMP102 Enterprise Information Technology COMP111 Information Technology Systems ELC1003 Extended Writing Skills GEC225 Exploration of the Cosmos* GEC270 History of Hong Kong* ITC1001 Design and Applied Technology*
# Details of the Foundation-Year Curriculum can be found here: https://www2.polyu.edu.hk/as/Polyu/SUBREG/Foundation/Foundation_Year_Curriculum.pdf
* Elective subjects for students who come from Guangdong Province and have been exempted from taking ‘CBS2050 Elementary Cantonese’ by the Programme Leader.
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
13 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
For students who enter the programme by following a local Advanced-level education system, and those who have already finished the Foundation Year, they will pursue their study in Year 1, Year 2 and Year 3 according to the progression pattern specific to each mode of study, as described in the following.
Year 1 — Semester 1
AMA227 Mathematics I 3 credits Compulsory EIE210 Electronics Design 3 credits Compulsory ELC2501 University English I 2 credits Compulsory ENG224 Information Technology 3 credits Compulsory ENG236 Computer Programming 3 credits Compulsory GE GE – China Studies 2 credits Compulsory IC291 Practical Training 5 training credits Compulsory
Year 1 — Semester 2
AMA228 Mathematics II 3 credits Compulsory EIE214 Introduction to Logic Design 3 credits Compulsory EIE226 Introduction to Databases 3 credits Compulsory EIE341 Signals and Systems 3 credits Compulsory ELC2502 University English II 2 credits Compulsory ENG236 Computer Programming (cont’d) --- Compulsory
Year 1 — Semester 3
IC291 Practical Training (cont’d) --- Compulsory
Year 2 — Semester 1
COMP407 Computer Graphics 3 credits Compulsory EIE320 Object-Oriented Design and Programming 3 credits Compulsory EIE345 Data Communication Technologies 3 credits Compulsory EIE343 Computer System Principles 3 credits Compulsory ELC3508 English for Effective Workplace 2 credits Compulsory Communication SD2492 Product Design and Social Considerations 3 credits Compulsory SD3984 Computer Game Development I 3 credits Compulsory
Year 2 — Semester 2
EIE328 Digital Signal Processing for Multimedia 3 credits Compulsory Applications EIE342 Computer Networks 3 credits Compulsory EIE360 Integrated Project 3 credits Compulsory EIE3109 Mobile Systems and Application Development 3 credits Compulsory SD3983 Computer Game Development II 3 credits Compulsory
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
14 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
Year 3 — Semester 1
CBS2080 Fundamentals of Chinese Communication 3 credits Compulsory EIE430 Honours Project 6 credits Compulsory Level 4 Technical Elective 3 credits Elective Level 4 Technical Elective 3 credits Elective Level 4 Technical Elective 3 credits Elective MM2711 Introduction to Marketing 3 credits Compulsory
Year 3 — Semester 2
EIE430 Honours Project (cont’d) --- Compulsory MM2021 Management and Organisation 3 credits Compulsory SD348 Introduction to Industrial Design 3 credits Compulsory Level 4 Technical Elective 3 credits Elective Level 4 Technical Elective 3 credits Elective GE GE – Broadening 2 credits Elective
Final Year Technical Electives COMP436 Middleware and Distributed Objects COMP437 Mobile Computing EIE408 Principles of Virtual Reality EIE414 Computer Architecture and Systems EIE424 Distributed Systems and Network Programming EIE426 Artificial Intelligence and Computer Vision EIE428 Multimedia Communications EIE429 Corporate Networking EIE431 Digital Video Production and Broadcasting EIE432 Web Systems and Technologies EIE435 Image and Audio Processing
Level 5 subjects EIE507 Network Design - Theory & Practice EIE522 Pattern Recognition: Theory & Applications EIE529 Digital Image Processing EIE536 High Speed Networks EIE541 Digital Signal Processing EIE546 Video Technology EIE552 Internet Technologies for Multimedia Applications EIE553 Security in Data Communication EIE555 Personal Networking Technology EIE556 Advanced DSP for Multimedia Communications
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
15 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
EIE557 Computational Intelligence and its Applications EIE558 Speech Processing and Recognition EIE563 Digital Audio Processing EIE565 Advanced Multimedia Technology EIE576 Information Technology in Biomedicine EIE579 Advanced Telecommunication Systems
Subject to the approval by the Programme Leader, students may take at most one Level 5 subject per semester to replace a final-year technical elective during their final year of study.
General Education Subjects Students are required to complete two 2-credit General Education subjects, one under the “China Studies” category and one under the “Broadening” category.
5. MODE OF STUDY AND FRAMEWORK
5.1 Mode of Study
The following information about the various modes of study apply to students who enter the programme either after having finished the Foundation Year, or through the local HKALE system or similar. The different years of the various modes of study are referred to as Foundation Year, Year 1, Year 2, Year 3 and Year 4.
All students will pursue identical study in Year 1 and Year 2. After Year 2, they may choose a particular mode of study according to their interest, planning, and places available. A mode of study is characterized by the credits and subjects required and the progression pattern in Year 1 to Year 4.
There are three modes of attendance, namely Full-time mode, Sandwich mode, and Cooperative Education Scheme (CES) mode.
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
16 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
(i) Full-time mode
Under the Full-time mode, students will normally pursue three years of study in full time and then graduate at the end of the third year after having satisfied all programme requirements.
Graduation
Final Year, Level 4 and Honours Project Minimum of 2 weeks of Work-Integrated Education
Year 2, Level 3
Summer between Year 1 and Year 2 3 weeks of Practical Training in Industrial Centre
Year 1, Level 2 2 weeks of Practical Training in Industrial Centre
Foundation year
Entry into Programme Entry into Programme
Local AL or similar Mainland or similar
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
17 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
(ii) Sandwich mode
Under the Sandwich mode, students will pursue the first and second years of study in full time, and then engage in industrial training lasting normally for one year. During the industrial training period, students may choose to study one subject each semester. After the industrial training year, students will pursue the fourth year of study in full time again. Normally students will graduate at the end of the fourth year after having satisfied all programme requirements.
Graduation
Final Year, Level 4 and Honours Project
Industrial Training for One Year
Year 2, Level 3
Summer between Year 1 and Year 2 3 weeks of Practical Training in Industrial Centre
Year 1, Level 2 2 weeks of Practical Training in Industrial Centre
Foundation year
Entry into Programme Entry into Programme
Local AL or similar Mainland or similar
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
18 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
(iii) Cooperative Education Scheme (CES) mode
Under the CES mode, students will pursue the first and second years of study in full time. From Semester 3 of Year 2 up to graduation, students will engage in industrial training while concurrently pursuing study of nine subjects in the University with day-release (one day leave per week) given by the employer. Students will be assigned with an industrial advisor from the enterprise where the student is being deployed, and an academic advisor from the EIE Department for guidance. In early Year 3 Semester 2, students will work together with the advisors to come up with a proposal for a job- related Honours Project, which will commence in Year 3 Semester 2 and complete in Year 4 Semester 1. In this case, students will graduate at the end of the first semester of the fourth academic year after having satisfied all programme requirements. This progression pattern is shown as Track 1 on the next page. In case of students not taking up a job-related Honours Project, students may choose to take up a normal Honours Project and the study will be extended to the end of Year 4 Semester 2. This progression pattern is shown as Track 2 on the next page.
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
19 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
Graduation
Year 3 & Year 4, Level 4 Cooperative Education, and a Year 3 & Year 4, Level 4 Cooperative Education, and an Job-related Honours Project commences in Year 3 Semester 2 and completes in Year 4 Honours Project commences in Year 4 Semester 1
Track 1 Track 2
Year 2, Level 3
Summer between Year 1 and Year 2 3 weeks of Practical Training in Industrial Centre
Year 1, Level 2 2 weeks of Practical Training in Industrial Centre
Foundation year
Entry into Programme Entry into Programme
Local AL or similar Mainland or similar
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
20 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
5.2 Framework for Industrial Training and Cooperative Education Scheme
Students who follow either the Sandwich mode or the CES mode of study will undergo Industrial Training or Cooperative Education respectively after the second year of study. This Section sets out the framework for these trainings.
(i) Training Contents of Industrial Training and Cooperative Education
The training will follow a structured scheme prepared jointly with the sponsoring firm and will be tailored for the student with reference to the firm to which the student will be attached.
(ii) Administration of the Industrial Training and Cooperative Education
Training will take place under the joint supervision of an Industrial Supervisor who will be appointed by the firm to which the trainee is attached, and a University Training Tutor appointed by the Department. The latter will liaise with the Industrial Supervisor to monitor the progress of the student. The Tutor will make frequent contact with the student and will visit the student on-site at regular intervals.
(iii) Report
At the end of the training period, the student will submit a written report.
(iv) Assessment of Industrial Training and Cooperative Education
For the Sandwich mode, the assessment will be completed in the first two weeks of the fourth year. For the CES Track 1 mode of study, the assessment will be completed within the examination week at the end of Semester 1 in the fourth year. For the CES Track 2 mode of study, the assessment will be completed within the examination week at the end of Semester 2 in the fourth year.
In the assessment of industrial training, the key consideration is the extent to which the objective of the training scheme has been met. The assessment components, their relative weightings and the corresponding assessors are set out as follows:
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
21 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
Component Assessor Weighting
Overall performance Industrial Supervisor 50% and report
Comments from company and University Training 50% report Tutor
For the Sandwich mode and the CES mode of study, a pass in Industrial Training or Cooperative Education Scheme respectively is mandatory before the student is eligible for the award of a degree.
6. HONOURS PROJECT
The Honours Project is considered to be of great importance for an engineering programme. This is reflected in the credits it carries, being 6 credits which are equivalent to two standard- sized subjects. Furthermore, the results of the Honours Project will be a decisive factor when the Board of Examiners considers the award classification of a student.
The feature of the Honours Project is “learning by doing”. It is intended to be a platform for the students to develop their intellectual and innovative abilities and to give them the opportunities to integrate and apply the knowledge and analytical skills gained in previous stages of study. It should also provide students with opportunities to develop their problem solving skills and communication skills. The progress from concept to final implementation and testing, through problem identification and the selection of appropriate solutions will be practised by the students.
6.1 Project Management
Normally each student will be assigned one project under the supervision of an academic staff member so that he/she will work independently to achieve the project objectives. In other cases, several students may work on different aspects of a larger- scale project.
The assignment of projects is expected to be completed by the month of June preceding the beginning of the final year of studies. Guidelines for Honours Project are given to students at the beginning of the final year of studies.
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
22 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
6.2 Project Assessment
Assessment of the Honours Project focuses in three main areas: project reports, oral presentations and work done over the whole project period. Assessment will be done by the project supervisor and an assessor. The Project Management Team, which is composed of the Programme Leader and staff members from teaching sections, will oversee the overall standard of assessment of the projects. The Project Management Team will also oversee the daily operation, such as fixing the dates of handling in project reports, oral presentations and demonstration, etc.
7. PRACTICAL TRAINING
Students are required to undergo training at the University’s Industrial Centre (IC). Students have to complete Practical Training (IC291), a 5 training credits subject outside the 100-credit curriculum. Practical Training is an important part of the Programme in which students are given hands-on training, including the use of scientific computation tool, and practice on manufacturing multimedia electronic product through a project in the design and fabrication of multimedia electronic product prototype. IC training is essential for students to blend knowledge into practice and promote critical thinking so as to prepare them for working in an authentic environment.
Students will be assessed and graded in the normal manner from A+ to F. Moreover, the grades obtained from the computer training courses will be counted towards the GPA but not to the Weighted GPA.
8. WORK-INTEGRATED EDUCATION (WIE)
8.1 WIE is a mandatory component of the programme. There can be several routes or options for the students to pursue Work-Integrated Education (WIE). These options include the Cooperative Education Scheme (CES), Sandwich mode of study, Preferred Graduate Development Programme (PGDP), industrial projects, and other workplace training opportunities provided by the University or found by students themselves, etc.
8.2 Credits Requirement
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
23 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
In order to graduate from this programme, students must attain a minimum of one WIE training credit within the period of study. WIE credits to be earned by students may vary. Following the Faculty of Engineering’s guideline, students will be awarded one WIE training credit for acquiring every two weeks’ full-time training. WIE training credits will not be counted towards the Grade Point Average (GPA) nor the Weighted GPA (WGPA). After assessing the student’s training performance, a Pass or a Fail grade will be awarded to the student on his/her WIE. The number of training credits obtained by the students depends on the actual job duration. For instance, in the case of CES mode of study, the student will earn a maximum of 39 WIE credits over a period of 78 weeks of full-time employment. In the case of Sandwich training, the number of WIE credits earned over a period of 1-year full-time employment will be 26. For the case of industrial attachment or industrial project, normally 2 WIE credits will be earned by the student over a period of 4 weeks of workplace training. For the case of PGDP, the nominal working period is 2 months, resulting in 4 WIE credits.
The WIE credits will be reflected in the Co-curricular Activities Transcript of the student, but will not be counted towards the non-credit bearing co-curricular activities as stated in Section 9.
8.3 Achievement of Programme Outcomes through WIE
Since WIE can be taken in different forms and applied to different kinds of job, the learning outcomes to be achieved will vary depending on the job nature and its duration engaged by the student. However, based on the experience gained from operating the CES and Sandwich modes of the Programme, WIE can bring a lot of advantages to students’ learning both in the profession-specific areas and in their all- round development. The extent to which a student can achieve the programme learning outcomes through WIE is assessed by the student’s industrial supervisor and Personal Tutor.
8.4 Forms of WIE
WIE under the Programme can be in many forms, namely Cooperative Education Scheme, Sandwich Training, industrial attachment, industrial project, Preferred Graduate Development Programme, and other job opportunities.
8.4.1 Cooperative Education Scheme (CES) (EIE387)
Under this Scheme, the students engage in WIE after the second year of study in the Programme. From Semester 3 of Year 2 up to Semester 1 of Year 4, students will
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
24 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
take up a full-time job to work. Concurrently, they will pursue their study of the remaining curriculum through a “day-release” (the student is released from the job one day per week by the employer) arrangement. The advantage of the CES mode of WIE is that the students can engage in larger scale of projects and are assumed to bear more responsibilities as a result of a fairly long period of employment (1.5 years). Furthermore, there may be possibility for the student to stay with the job “non-stop” after graduation. The WIE performance of the student in CES mode is assessed and a grade is assigned to the subject EIE387.
8.4.2 Sandwich Training (EIE388)
The Sandwich Training is quite similar to the CES, except that its workplace training duration is not as long as CES. After the second year of study, the students will engage in a full-time job for one year. On completion of the WIE in the Sandwich mode, the student will return to the University to continue the study of the remaining curriculum. The WIE performance of the student in Sandwich Training is assessed and a grade is assigned to the subject EIE388.
8.4.3 Industrial Project
Industrial projects are Honours Projects working with the industry. Students working on an industrial project will pursue the project in the company for a certain period of time. Students will work with a real-life project in the real working environment.
8.4.4 Preferred Graduate Development Programme (PGDP)
Under the PGDP, students will engage in a real working environment by working in a company which is a partner of the PGDP programme coordinated by the SAO. The duration is usually several weeks in the summer vacation period. Such kind of training opportunity is recognized as a WIE option.
8.4.5 Other Job Opportunities
It is possible that the students themselves find a job to work with during their free time. This kind of job opportunities will be judged by the Department whether it is helpful to the students in achieving the intended programme learning outcomes. The students and the Personal Tutors/WIE Coordinators will work collaboratively with regard to the job selection and the subsequent training contents. The Department will constantly monitor the progress. At the end of the training, an assessment will be made on the student’s achievement of learning outcomes.
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
25 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
8.5 Guidelines for Operation and Supervision of WIE
The Department adopts a set of strategies to support students’ learning in the workplace. The followings are the details of the operation at different stages.
8.5.1 Preparation
The Department will actively align with the industry to get WIE placement opportunities for students. It is important for students to be fully aware of the benefits brought by WIE. Students will be asked to attend employment seminars as early as possible. Through this type of arrangement, the students in all years will be better prepared for job hunting and employment in advance. Students will also be able to realize the benefits for engaging in WIE and the importance of taking an active role in completing the training with the best effort.
8.5.2 Operation
There will be WIE Coordinators overseeing all matters related to WIE activities under the Programme. The WIE Coordinators are the academic staff members of the Department responsible for the organization and operation of WIE activities. To guide and monitor students in obtaining the WIE component, each student will be assigned an academic supervisor (who is also the student’s Personal Tutor) from the Department. The student and his/her Personal Tutor will jointly plan the WIE details, such as job selection, training plan, logging of activities, reporting, and assessment. The Personal Tutor will make contacts with the student and, if appropriate, the employer to monitor the progress of the student.
8.5.3 Monitoring and assessment
Each student will be guided by his/her Personal Tutor when conducting the WIE training. The student’s work will also be monitored continuously and an assessment will be given when the WIE placement is completed.
8.5.4 Assessment of WIE
The objective of assessment is to determine what has been achieved by the student through WIE. The actual type of work and duration vary in different cases. For instance, there will be students taking 2-week full-time jobs while some other may
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
26 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
undergo a 1.5-year CES training. Hence an assessment framework is set out in the following as a general guideline.
(i) Continuous Assessment
The Personal Tutor may visit the student during the training period so that the Personal Tutor and the employer will be able to discuss the student’s performance together. This will give better feedback on the student’s performance before the training is completed.
(ii) Report
After the training is completed, the student is required to submit a report to the Personal Tutor. The report must be duly endorsed by the industrial supervisor. The details to be contained in the report should be commensurate with the training duration. In the report, the student should contain a brief account on the training received, the objectives that have been achieved, and the experience gained. The student may also conduct a self-evaluation on his/her own performance.
(iii) Employer Evaluation
At the end of the training period, the industrial supervisor will provide an evaluation of the student’s performance, assessing the student’s work and all-round development.
(iv) Overall Assessment
An overall assessment of the student’s performance will be made by the Personal Tutor by considering all the assessment components as stated in Section 8.5.4(i)-(iii). A pass grade will be given to the student upon satisfactory completion of the WIE; otherwise a failure grade will be given.
9. CO-CURRICULAR ACTIVITIES
9.1 Students are required to participate in at least 6 cumulative hours of non-credit bearing co-curricular activities (CCA) in order to satisfy the overall requirement of general education before graduation. The said duration can be a combination of a number of recognized CCA. The scope of activities recognized for fulfilling the
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
27 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
requirement of mandatory CCA is determined by Student Affairs Office (SAO) (http://www.polyu.edu.hk/sao/cca) and outlined as follows:
(i) The CCA is non-credit bearing and non-course-required. (ii) The learning outcomes of such activities/programmes should be able to broaden students’ horizon, and inspire them to actualize all-round development with emphasis on the strengthening of competencies as mentioned in Section 2.2. (iii) The format of these activities can be structured short courses, experiential learning, workshops, competitions, talks and seminars, study tour, voluntary work within PolyU and Community Service Learning Programme, etc. (iv) Community projects can be also recognized as co-curricular activities if the community services are endorsed by faculty/school/department. Community projects with pre-training and/or briefing sessions are more desirable. (v) The activities should be organized or co-organized by PolyU faculties/schools/departments/units/committees, and/or endorsed by the aforesaid parties as fulfilling the above criteria. The organizer of these activities should ensure that quality assurance mechanism is in place as a measurement of student learning outcome.
9.2 Exception
Activities like internship, placement, paid work, and contribution made by office- bearers in student bodies are NOT considered as CCA. Activities counted as Work- integrated Education (WIE) should not be counted as CCA.
9.3 Fulfilment Status
Students may check their CCA Fulfilment Status in SPECIAL ePortfolio at http://www.polyu.edu.hk/sao/special/portal.
Besides, students will be notified by email if they have not fulfilled the CCA requirement. Email reminder encouraging students to take part in co-curricular activities will be sent once every semester.
10. DEPARTMENTAL UNDERGRADUATE PROGRAMME COMMITTEE
10.1 The composition of the Departmental Undergraduate Programme Committee is decided by the Head of Department and normally, it consists of Programme Leaders of all
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
28 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
degree and higher diploma programmes hosted by the Department, Head of Department, representative from the Departmental Learning and Teaching Committee, teaching staff representatives, representatives from major serving departments and student representatives. The Committee is responsible for programme review and development.
10.2 The Committee will collect and consider, on a regular basis, the views of students and other key stakeholders on the relevance and currency of the syllabi, the standards of the examinations, the development of the programme, the adequacy of resources and the local and worldwide trends related to learning and teaching, for the continuous improvement of the programmes.
11. “REGULAR” STUDENT, “SELF-PACED” STUDENT, AND STUDENT STATUS
11.1 Students’ eligibility for the range of services provided by the University will be governed by the students’ status, which is determined with reference to the mode of attendance of the academic programmes enrolled and/or the study load as described in Sections 11.5 to 11.7 below.
11.2 Students are normally expected to follow the specified progression pattern. These are referred to as “regular” students. Those students who have been given special approval by the Programme Leader and the Head of Department for not following the specified pattern are referred to as “self-paced” students.
11.3 Students who register on programmes without any specified progression pattern are also known as self-paced students.
11.4 Self-paced students, either accelerated or decelerated, are required to seek counselling and approval from the Programme Leader and the Head of Department.
Student status:
11.5 Students enrolling on full-time/sandwich programmes or mixed-mode programme, with a study load of 9 credits or more in a semester, are classified as full-time students. Students on full-time/sandwich programmes who wish to change their status, from full- time to part-time, i.e. enrolling for less than 9 credits in a semester, will have to seek prior approval from their Department [please also refer to Section 11.6 (i)].
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
29 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
11.6 (i) Students enrolling on part-time, distance learning, online, and mixed-mode programmes, with a study load of less than 9 credits in a semester, are classified as part-time students.
(ii) Students who enroll on full-time programmes but have been given permission to take less than 9 credits in a semester will be given the option to pay credit fees. If students wish to exercise such option, they have to inform the Department before the end of the add/drop period of that semester. These credit-fee-paying students are classified as part-time students for that semester.
11.7 Students enrolling on mixed-mode programmes are classified as mixed-mode students. They may engage in a full-time or part-time study load and attend classes either in the evening, in the daytime, or a combination of both. If the mixed-mode students take subjects with a study load reaching the minimum requirement of a full- time student, they will be given full-time status in that semester. Otherwise, they will be given part-time status.
11.8 Students who wish to take individual subjects, but do not wish to register as a candidate for an award, are classified as subject-based students.
12. SUBJECT REGISTRATION (INCLUDING ADD / DROP / WITHDRAWAL OF SUBJECTS)
12.1 In addition to programme registration, students need to register for the subjects at specified periods prior to the commencement of the semester. An add/drop period will also be scheduled for each semester. Students may apply for withdrawal of their registration on a subject after the add/drop period if they have a genuine need to do so. The application should be made to the relevant programme offering Department and will require the approval of both the subject lecturer and the host Department Programme Leader concerned (or an alternate academic staff authorised by the programme host Department). Applications submitted after the commencement of the examination period will not be considered. For approved applications, the tuition fee paid for the subject will be forfeited and the withdrawal status of the subject will be shown in the examination result notification and transcript of studies but will not be counted towards the calculation of GPA.
12.2 The pre-requisite requirements of a subject must have been fulfilled before a student registers for that subject. However, the subject offering department has the discretion to waive the pre-requisite requirements of a subject, if deemed appropriate. If the pre- requisite subject concerned forms part of the requirements for award, the subject has to
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
30 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
be passed in order to satisfy the graduation requirements for the programme concerned despite the waiving of the pre-requisite.
12.3 Subject to the maximum study load of 21 credits per semester and the availability of study places, students are allowed to take additional subjects on top of the prescribed credit requirement for award before they become eligible for graduation. For students of full-time programmes, they can take additional subjects from within or outside their programme curriculum. Students can choose freely from those subjects which are available for selection (unless they are barred because of pre-requisites).
12.4 Starting from the 2007/08 cohort of intakes, students studying the foundation year of a 4-year curriculum Bachelor's degree programme will be treated in the same way as students on a 3-year curriculum, in respect of taking additional subjects. Thus, the additional number of subjects taken (which are over and above that required by the programme) will be graded and shown on transcripts. They will be counted in the cumulative and semester GPA, but not necessarily in the weighted GPA (when they are being considered for their award classification). These additional subjects cannot be taken by students on a pass/fail basis and students' requests to audit such subjects will be considered by the Department on a case by case basis.
13. ZERO SUBJECT ENROLMENT
No students will be allowed not taking subject in any semester unless they have obtained prior approval from the Programme Leader and the Head of Department and in any case not later than the end of the add/drop period; otherwise they will be classified as having unofficially withdrawn from their programme. Students who have been approved for zero subject enrolment (i.e. not taking any subject in a semester) are allowed to retain their student status and continue using campus facilities and library facilities. Any semester in which the students are allowed not taking subject will nevertheless be counted towards the maximum period of registration.
14. SUBJECT EXEMPTION
Students may be exempted from taking any specified subjects, including mandatory language or general education subjects, if they have successfully completed similar subjects previously in another programme or have demonstrated the level of proficiency/ability to the satisfaction of the subject offering department. Subject exemption is normally decided by the subject offering department (for “Broadening” GE subjects and for all subjects at admission stage, the decision will be made by the programme offering department). However, for applications which are
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
31 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
submitted by students who have completed an approved student exchange programme, the subject exemption is to be decided by the host department in consultation with the subject offering departments. In case of disagreement between the host department and the subject offering department, the two Faculty Deans/School Board Chairmen concerned will make a final decision jointly on the application. If students are exempted from taking a specified subject, the credits associated with the exempted subject will not be counted towards the award requirements (except for exemptions granted at admission stage). It will therefore be necessary for the students to consult the host department and take another subject in order to satisfy the credit requirement for the award.
15. CREDIT TRANSFER
15.1 Students may be given credits for recognised previous studies (including mandatory language or general education subjects; please refer also to Section 3.3 above) and the credits will be counted towards meeting the requirements for award. Transferred credits may be counted towards more than one award. The granting of credit transfer is a matter of academic judgment. In assessing the transferability of subjects previously taken, the syllabus of that subject should be carefully scrutinized to ascertain that it is comparable to the PolyU's curriculum. Whether the previous studies are from institutions on credit-based or non-credit-based system should not be a matter of concern, and the subject size need not be a perfect match. To ascertain the academic standing of the institution offering the previous studies, the Department might need to request the institutions concerned to provide more relevant information.
15.2 Credit transfer may be done with or without the grade being carried over; the former should normally be used when the credits were gained from PolyU. Credit transfer with the grade being carried over may be granted for subjects taken from outside the University, if deemed appropriate, and with due consideration to the academic equivalence of the subjects concerned and the comparability of the grading systems adopted by the University and the other approved institutions. Subject credit transfer is normally decided by the subject offering Department (for "Broadening" GE subjects, however, the decision will be made by the programme offering Department). However, for applications which are submitted by students who have completed an approved student exchange programme, the decision will be made by the programme offering Department in consultation with the subject offering Departments. As the application for credit transfer may involve subjects offered by more than one Department, the programme offering Department should coordinate and check
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
32 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
whether the maximum limit for credit transfer for a student has been exceeded, and whether the student has fulfilled the residential requirement of the University.
15.3 In case of disagreement between the programme offering Department and the subject offering Department, the two Faculty Deans/School Board Chairmen concerned will make a final decision jointly on the application.
15.4 Normally, not more than 50% of the credit requirement for award may be transferable from approved institutions outside the University. For transfer of credits from programmes offered by PolyU, normally not more than 67% of the credit requirement for award can be transferred. In cases where both types of credits are being transferred (i.e. from programmes offered by PolyU and from approved institutions outside the University), not more than 50% of the credit requirement for award may be transferred.
15.5 If the transferred credits are part of a PolyU programme which is accredited by a professional body, the Department concerned should ensure that the transferred credits will also meet the requirement of the relevant professional body.
15.6 If a student is waived from a particular stage of study on the basis of advanced qualifications held at the time of admission, the student concerned will be required to complete fewer credits for award. For these students, the exempted credits will be counted towards the maximum limit for credit transfer when students apply for further credit transfer after their admission.
15.7 Notwithstanding the upper limits stipulated in Section 15.4 above, (and unless professional bodies stipulate otherwise) students may be given more credit transfer than these upper limits (e.g. upon completion of exchange activity as mentioned in Section 15.8 below), subject to their satisfying the residential requirement.
15.8 Credit transfer can be applicable to credits earned by students through study at an overseas institution under an approved exchange programme. Students should, before they go abroad for the exchange programme, seek prior approval from the programme offering Department (who will consult the subject offering Departments as appropriate) on their study plan and credit transferability. As with all other credit transfer applications, the Departments concerned should scrutinise the syllabuses of the subjects which the students are going to take at the overseas institution, and determine their credit transferability based on academic equivalence with the corresponding subjects on offer at the PolyU, and the comparability of the grading systems adopted by PolyU and the overseas institution. The transferability of credits,
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
33 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
and the suitability for allowing grades to be carried over, must be determined and communicated to students before they go abroad for the exchange programme. In order to overcome the problems associated with subject-to-subject mappings, block credit transfer rather than subject-by-subject credit transfer can be given.
15.9 All credit transfers approved will take effect only in the semester for which they are approved. A student who applies for transfer of credits during the re-enrolment or the add/drop period of a particular semester will only be eligible for graduation at the end of that semester, even if the granting of credit transfer will immediately enable the student to satisfy the credit requirement for the award.
16. DEFERMENT OF STUDY
16.1 Students may apply for deferment of study if they have a genuine need to do so such as illness. Approval from the Programme Leader and the Head of Department is required. The deferment period will not be counted as part of the maximum period of registration.
16.2 Application for deferment of study will be entertained only in exceptional circumstances from students who have not yet completed the first year of a full-time or sandwich programme.
16.3 Where the period of deferment of study begins during a stage for which fees have been paid, no refund of such fees will be made.
16.4 Students who have been approved for deferment are not entitled to enjoy any campus facilities during the deferment period.
17. PRINCIPLES OF ASSESSMENT
17.1 Assessment of learning and assessment for learning are both important for assuring the quality of student learning. Assessment of learning is to evaluate whether students have achieved the intended learning outcomes of the subjects that they have taken and have attained the overall learning outcomes of the academic programme at the end of their study at a standard appropriate to the award. Appropriate methods of assessment that align with the intended learning outcomes will be designed for this purpose. The assessment methods will also enable the teacher to differentiate students’ different
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
34 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
levels of performance within the subject. Assessment for learning is to engage students in productive learning activities through purposefully designed assessment tasks.
17.2 Assessment will also serve as feedback to students. The assessment criteria and standards will be made explicit to students before the start of the assessment to facilitate student learning, and feedback provided will link to the criteria and standards. Timely feedback will be provided to students so that they are aware of their progress and attainment for the purpose of improvement.
17.3 The ultimate authority in the University for the confirmation of academic decisions is the Senate, but for practical reasons, the Senate has delegated to the Faculty/School Boards the authority to confirm the decisions of Boards of Examiners provided these are made within the framework of the general assessment regulations within the University. Recommendations from Board of Examiners which fall outside these regulations shall be ratified by VP(AD) and reported to the Senate.
18. ASSESSMENT METHODS
18.1 Students' performance in a subject shall be assessed by continuous assessment and/or examinations. Where both methods are used, the weighting of each in the overall subject grade will be clearly stated in the syllabus.
18.2 Continuous assessment may include tests, assignments, projects, laboratory work, field exercises, presentations and other forms of classroom participation. Continuous Assessment assignments which involve group work should nevertheless include some individual components therein. The contribution made by each student in continuous assessment involving a group effort shall be determined and assessed separately.
18.3 Assessment methods and parameters of subjects shall be determined by the subject offering department.
18.4 At the beginning of each semester, the subject teacher will inform students of the details of the methods of assessments to be used in the subject concerned.
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
35 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
19. ASSESSMENT RESULTS
19.1 Subject Lecturers have sole responsibilities for marking students' coursework and examinations scripts, grading them, finalising the results and informing each student of his/her results, in respect of the subject they teach. In this regard, Subject Lecturers will be accountable to the Head of the subject offering Department, to ensure that the scripts are correctly marked and graded, and to avoid administrative errors at all times. To ensure consistency and uniformity for a common subject taught by different Subject Lecturers, meetings can be arranged amongst them before the examination papers are set or before the marking is done.
19.2 Subject Assessment Review Panel (SARP) may also be formed by the Head of the Department offering the subjects to review and finalise the subject grades for submission to the Board of Examiners. One Subject Assessment Review Panel may be formed to take care of all subjects offered by the Department.
19.3 SARP shall include the Head of the Department offering the subjects (as Chairman), the relevant subject examiners and where appropriate, the programme leader.
20. BOARD OF EXAMINERS (BoE)
20.1 The authority for approving the overall results of students rests with the Board of Examiners (BoE). The BoE will meet at the end of each semester (except for Summer Term unless there are students who are eligible to graduate after completion of Summer Term subjects) and is responsible to the Senate for making: (i) a decision on the classification of awards to be granted to each student on completion of the programme; (ii) a decision on deregistration cases; and (iii) a decision on cases with extenuating circumstance.
20.2 These decisions are made by the full BoE at the end of each semester in the light of the standard of student achievement appropriate to the award to which the programme is designed to lead, the aims of the programme, the performance on the programme in previous years, the general assessment regulations of the University and the specific programme regulations, and good practice established in the University and elsewhere.
20.3 The BoE will not attempt to change the grades for any student in any subject nor condone failures. The above decisions of the BoE, except those on award and deregistration cases which are straight forward, will be ratified by the Faculty Board.
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
36 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
The Faculty Board may refer the decisions back to the BoE for further consideration and explanation.
20.4 Any decisions by the BoE outside the general assessment regulations of the University, supported by the Faculty Board, shall be referred to VP(AD) for ratification. All such cases shall be reported to the Senate. Decisions by BoE outside the programme regulations but within the general assessment regulations of the University fall within the authority of the Faculty Board.
20.5 Students shall be formally notified of decisions affecting them after the BoE meeting except for those cases which require ratification of the Faculty Board. These latter students shall be formally notified of decisions after the Faculty Board’s ratification or, if a decision is outside the general assessment regulations, after VP(AD) ratifies that decision. Any prior communication of results to these students shall be subject to formal ratification.
21. PROGRESSION / ACADEMIC PROBATION / DEREGISTRATION
21.1 The Board of Examiners shall, at the end of each semester (except for Summer Term unless there are students who are eligible to graduate after completion of Summer Term subjects), determine whether each student is: (i) eligible for progression towards an award; or (ii) eligible for an award; or (iii) required to be deregistered from the programme.
21.2 When a student has a Grade Point Average (GPA) (see Section 25.3 below) lower than 2.0, he/she will be put on academic probation in the following semester. Once when a student is able to pull his GPA up to 2.0 or above at the end of the probation semester, the status of “academic probation” will be lifted. The status of “academic probation” will be reflected in the examination result notification but not in transcript of studies.
21.3 A student will have ‘progressing’ status unless he falls within the following categories, either of which may be regarded as grounds for deregistration from the programme: (i) the student has exceeded the maximum period of registration for the programme as specified in this programme booklet; or (ii) the student’s GPA is lower than 2.0 for two consecutive semesters and his Semester GPA in the second semester is also lower than 2.0; or (iii) the student’s GPA is lower than 2.0 for three consecutive semesters.
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
37 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
21.4 The progression of students to the following academic year will not be affected by the GPA obtained in Summer Term, unless the programme enrolled falls into the category described in Section 21.5 below and otherwise specified in this programme booklet.
21.5 Exceptions to Section 21.4 above could only be made if the Summer Term study is mandatory for all students of the programme and that the study constitutes a substantial requirement for graduation.
21.6 Notwithstanding Sections 21.3(ii) and 21.3(iii) above, a student may be deregistered from the programme enrolled before the time specified in Sections 21.3(ii) and 21.3(iii) above if his academic performance is poor to the extent that the Board of Examiners deems that his chance of attaining a GPA of 2.0 at the end of the programme is slim or impossible.
21.7 In the event that there are good reasons, the Board of Examiners has the discretion to recommend that students who fall into categories as stated in Sections 21.3(ii) or 21.3(iii) above be allowed to stay on the programme, and these recommendations should be presented to the relevant Faculty/School Board for final decision.
21.8 Under the current procedures, a student can appeal against the decisions of Boards of Examiners to deregister him/her. If such an appeal was upheld by the Department, the recommendation (to reverse the previous decision to deregister the student) will also be presented to the relevant Faculty Board for final decision.
22. APPEAL AGAINST ASSESSMENT RESULTS
A student may appeal against a decision of a Subject Assessment Review Panel or the Board of Examiners within 7 working days upon the public announcement of the examination results. The procedures for appeals against examination results are detailed in the Student Handbook.
23. RETAKING OF SUBJECTS
23.1 Students may retake any subject for the purpose of improving their grade without having to seek approval, but they must retake a compulsory subject which they have failed, i.e. obtained an F grade. Retaking of subjects is with the condition that the
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
38 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
maximum study load of 21 credits per semester is not exceeded. Students wishing to retake passed subjects will be accorded a lower priority than those who are required to retake (due to failure in a compulsory subject) and can only do so if places are available.
23.2 The number of retakes of a subject is not restricted. Only the grade obtained in the final attempt of retaking (even if the retake grade is lower than the original grade for originally passed subject) will be included in the calculation of the Grade Point Average (GPA). If students have passed a subject but failed after retake, credits accumulated for passing the subject in a previous attempt will remain valid for satisfying the credit requirement for award. (The grades obtained in previous attempts will only be reflected in transcript of studies.).
23.3 In cases where a student takes another subject to replace a failed elective subject, the fail grade will be taken into account in the calculation of the GPA, despite the passing of the replacement subject.
24. EXCEPTIONAL CIRCUMSTANCES
Absence from an assessment component
24.1 If a student is unable to complete all the assessment components of a subject, due to illness or other circumstances which are beyond his control and considered by the subject offering Department as legitimate, the Department will determine whether the student will have to complete a late assessment and, if so, by what means. This late assessment shall take place at the earliest opportunity, and before the commencement of the following academic year (except that for Summer Term, which may take place within 3 weeks after the finalisation of Summer Term results). If the late assessment cannot be completed before the commencement of the following academic year, the Faculty/School Board Chairman shall decide on an appropriate time for completion of the late assessment.
24.2 The student concerned is required to submit his/her application for late assessment in writing to the Head of Department offering the subject, within five working days from the date of the examination, together with any supporting documents (e.g. medical certificate). Approval of applications for late assessment and the means for such late assessments shall be given by the Head of Department offering the subject or the Programme Leader or the Subject Lecturer concerned.
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
39 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
Aegrotat award
24.3 If a student is unable to complete the requirements of the programme in question for the award due to very serious illness, or other very special circumstances which are beyond his control, and considered by the Board of Examiners as legitimate, the Faculty/School Board will determine whether the student will be granted an aegrotat award. Aegrotat award will be granted under very exceptional circumstances.
24.4 A student who has been offered an aegrotat award shall have the right to opt either to accept such an award, or request to be assessed on another occasion to be stipulated by the Board of Examiners; the student’s exercise of this option shall be irrevocable.
24.5 The acceptance of an aegrotat award by a student shall disqualify him from any subsequent assessment for the same award.
24.6 An aegrotat award shall normally not be classified, and the award parchment shall not state that it is an aegrotat award. However, the Board of Examiners may determine whether the award should be classified provided that they have adequate information on the students’ academic performance.
Other particular circumstances
24.7 A student’s particular circumstances may influence the procedures for assessment but not the standard of performance expected in assessment.
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
40 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
25. GRADING
25.1 Assessment grades shall be awarded on a criterion-referenced basis. A student’s overall performance in a subject shall be graded as follows:
Subject Short Elaboration on subject grading grade description description The student's work is exceptionally outstanding. It Exceptionally A+ exceeds the intended subject learning outcomes in all Outstanding regards.
The student's work is outstanding. It exceeds the A Outstanding intended subject learning outcomes in nearly all regards.
The student's work is very good. It exceeds the B+ Very Good intended subject learning outcomes in most regards.
The student's work is good. It exceeds the intended B Good subject learning outcomes in some regards.
Wholly The student's work is wholly satisfactory. It fully meets C+ Satisfactory the intended subject learning outcomes.
The student's work is satisfactory. It largely meets the C Satisfactory intended subject learning outcomes.
Barely The student's work is barely satisfactory. It marginally D+ Satisfactory meets the intended subject learning outcomes.
The student's work is barely adequate. It meets the Barely D intended subject learning outcomes only in some Adequate regards.
The student's work is inadequate. It fails to meet F Inadequate many of the intended subject learning outcomes.
‘F’ is a subject failure grade, whilst all others (‘D’ to ‘A+’) are subject passing grades. No credit will be earned if a subject is failed.
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
41 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
25.2 A numeral grade point is assigned to each subject grade, as follows:
Grade Grade Point A+ 4.5
A 4
B+ 3.5
B 3
C+ 2.5
C 2
D+ 1.5
D 1
F 0
25.3 At the end of each semester, a Grade Point Average (GPA) will be computed as follows, and based on the grade point of all the subjects:
∑ Subject Grade Point × Subject Credit Value n GPA =
∑ Subject Credit Value n
where n = number of all subjects (inclusive of failed subjects) taken by the student up to and including the latest semester, but for subjects which have been retaken, only the grade obtained in the final attempt will be included in the GPA calculation.
In addition, the following subjects will be excluded from the GPA calculation: (i) Exempted subjects (ii) Ungraded subjects (iii) Incomplete subjects (iv) Subjects for which credit transfer has been approved without any grade assigned (v) Subjects from which a student has been allowed to withdraw (i.e. those with the grade ‘W’)
A subject which has been given an “S” subject code, i.e. absent from examination, will be included in the GPA calculation and will be counted as “zero” grade point.
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
42 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
GPA is thus the unweighted cumulative average calculated for a student, for all relevant subjects taken from the start of the programme to a particular reference point of time. GPA is an indicator of overall performance and is capped at 4.0.
26. ELIGIBILITY FOR AWARD
For students entering the programme via the local Advanced Level examination system, they will pursue a 3-year study in Year 1, Year 2 and Year 3. For these students, the requirements for BSc(Hons) in IMT award are specified in the following Sections 26.1 to 26.3. For students entering the programme form Chinese Mainland or countries which have an education system different from the current Hong Kong system, they will have to pursue a 4-year curriculum in this programme. They will have to satisfy the 32 credits requirement as specified in the Foundation-Year curriculum in addition to the requirements as stated in Sections 26.1 to 26.3 below in order to be eligible for the BSc(Hons) in IMT award.
26.1 Students are required to acquire a total of 100 credits in order to graduate from this Programme.
A student would be eligible for award if he/she satisfies all the subject requirements listed below:
(i) Completes all compulsory subjects, the practical training and the honours project. (ii) Completes 5 technical electives, and two 2-credit General Education subjects (one under the “China Studies” category and one under the “Broadening” category). (iii) Satisfies the residential requirement for at least 1/3 of the credits to be completed for the award the student is currently enrolled, unless the professional bodies stipulate otherwise. (iv) Obtains at least 1 WIE credit as set out in Section 8. (v) Fulfills the requirement of co-curricular activities as set out in Section 9. (vi) Achieves a GPA of 2.0 or above. (vii) Fulfills the University language requirements as set out in Section 4.2. (viii) Passes Foundation Mathematics (AMA106) (It is only applicable to admittees who have not studied Foundation Year and who do not have a "pass" in the A-level Mathematics subject(s), and who have not been given credit transfer for the subject AMA227 stipulated in the curriculum. These students are required to take a mandatory Mathematics Benchmark Test (MBT) prior to the commencement of their studies. Those who pass the MBT are exempted from this graduation requirement and they Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
43 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
follow the normal study pattern. Those who fail or do not attend the MBT are required to take a non-credit bearing subject AMA106 “Foundation Mathematics”, which is a pre-requisite for AMA227. A pass in AMA106 “Foundation Mathematics” is thus a graduation requirement for these students.)
26.2 A student is required to graduate as soon as he/she satisfies all the conditions for award as set out in Section 26.1 above.
26.3 Subject to the maximum study load of 21 credits per semester, a student may take more credits than he/she needs to graduate on top of the prescribed credit requirements for his/her award in or before the semester within which he/she becomes eligible for award.
27. GUIDELINES FOR AWARD CLASSIFICATION
27.1 The guidelines for award classification are stated in the following. In using these guidelines, the Board of Examiners shall exercise its judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student, and where appropriate, may use other relevant information.
27.2 This programme uses Weighted GPA as a guide for helping to determine award classifications. Subjects studied in Foundation Year will not be counted towards the Weighted GPA. Only subjects contained in the Year 1, Year 2, and Year 3 curricula will be counted towards the Weighted GPA. All Level 2 subjects carry a weighting of 0.2. All Level 3, Level 4 and Level 5 subjects carry a weighting of 0.4. The weighting of each level is a measure of the relevance of the level to the classifications of the degree.
Weighted GPA will be computed as follows:
∑ Subject Grade Point × Subject Credit Value × Wi n Weighted GPA =
∑ Subject Credit Value × Wi n
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
44 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
where Wi = weight assigned according to the level of the subject. n = number of all subjects counted in GPA calculation as set out in Section 25.3, except those exclusions specified in Section 27.3.
Same as GPA, Weighted GPA is capped at 4.0.
27.3 Any subjects passed after the graduation requirement has been met or subjects taken on top of the prescribed credit requirements for award shall not be taken into account in the grade point calculation for award classification. However, if a student attempts more elective subjects (or optional subjects) than those required for graduation in or before the semester in which he/she becomes eligible for award, the elective subjects (or optional subjects) with a higher grade/contribution shall be included in the grade point calculation (i.e. the excessive subjects attempted with a lower grade/ contribution, including failed subjects, will be excluded).
27.4 The following are guidelines for Board for Examiners’ reference in determining award classifications:
Award Classification Guidelines
The student’s performance/attainment is outstanding, and 1st identifies him/her as exceptionally able in the field covered by the programme in question.
nd The student has reached a standard of performance/attainment 2 (Division I) which is more than satisfactory but less than outstanding.
The student has reached a standard of performance/attainment 2nd (Division II) judged to be satisfactory, and clearly higher than the ‘essential minimum’ required for graduation.
The student has attained the ‘essential minimum’ required for 3rd graduation at a standard ranging from just adequate to just satisfactory.
27.5 A Pass-without-Honours degree award will be recommended only under exceptional circumstances, when the student has demonstrated a level of final attainment which is below the ‘essential minimum’ required for graduation with Honours from the programme in question, but when he has nonetheless covered the prescribed work of the programme in an adequate fashion, while failing to show sufficient evidence of the intellectual calibre expected of Honours degree graduates. For example, if a student in an Honours degree programme has a Grade Point Average (GPA) of 2.0 or more, but his Weighted GPA is less than 2.0, he may be considered for a Pass-without- Honours classification.
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
45 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
27.6 The following is a set of indicators, for Boards of Examiners’ reference, which can be used in helping to determine award classification:
Award Classification Weighted GPA
1st 3.7+ - 4
2nd (Division I) 3.2+ - 3.7-
2nd (Division II) 2.3+ - 3.2-
3rd 2.0 - 2.3-
Note: "+" sign denotes 'equal to or more than'; "−" sign denotes 'less than'.
27.7 There is no requirement for the Board of Examiners to produce an award list which conforms to the guidelines in Section 27.6 above.
28. MAJOR IN INTERNET AND MULTIMEDIA TECHNOLOGIES
28.1 Application for Taking Major/Minor Option
Students will be invited in their first year of registration to indicate an irrevocable option of whether to follow a Major/Minor route or to continue with the single-discipline degree. In conjunction with the Major in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (Major in IMT) programme, students may either choose a specific Minor programme, in which a set of specific subjects are prescribed for students to study, or students may just freely select elective subjects to fulfil the credit requirements (such subjects are called free electives). Normally a Minor programme requires 18 credits.
28.2 Progression Pattern
If a student chooses to follow the Major/Minor route of study, he/she will basically follow the progression pattern set out below when selecting the subjects to study in Year 1, Year 2 and Year 3. In this regard, he/she should consult the Programme Leader in choosing the subjects to study in a particular stage.
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
46 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
Year 1 — Semester 1
AMA227 Mathematics I 3 credits Compulsory EIE210 Electronics Design 3 credits Compulsory ELC2501 University English I 2 credits Compulsory ENG224 Information Technology 3 credits Compulsory ENG236 Computer Programming 3 credits Compulsory GE GE – China Studies 2 credits Compulsory IC291 Practical Training 5 training credits Compulsory
Year 1 — Semester 2
AMA228 Mathematics II 3 credits Compulsory EIE214 Introduction to Logic Design 3 credits Compulsory EIE226 Introduction to Databases 3 credits Compulsory EIE341 Signals and Systems 3 credits Compulsory ELC2502 University English II 2 credits Compulsory ENG236 Computer Programming (cont’d) --- Compulsory
Year 1 — Semester 3
IC291 Practical Training (cont’d) --- Compulsory
Year 2 — Semester 1
EIE320 Object-Oriented Design and Programming 3 credits Compulsory EIE343 Computer System Principles 3 credits Compulsory EIE345 Data Communication Technologies 3 credits Compulsory ELC3508 English for Effective Workplace 2 credits Compulsory Communication SD2492 Product Design and Social Considerations 3 credits Compulsory SD3984 Computer Game Development I 3 credits Compulsory
Year 2 — Semester 2
EIE342 Computer Networks 3 credits Compulsory EIE360 Integrated Project 3 credits Compulsory Major/ Minor/ 4 Major/ Minor/ Free Electives# 12 credits Free
Year 3 — Semester 1
CBS2080 Fundamentals of Chinese Communication 3 credits Compulsory MM2711 Introduction to Marketing 3 credits Compulsory Major/ Minor/ 4 Major/ Minor/ Free Electives# 12 credits Free
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
47 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
Year 3 — Semester 2
MM2021 Management and Organisation 3 credits Compulsory GE GE – Broadening 2 credits Elective Major/ Minor/ 4 Major/ Minor/ Free Electives# 12 credits Free
# Total credits accumulated for “Major Electives” in Year 2 and Year 3 must be at least 15 credits.
28.3 Credit Requirement for Major in IMT Award
The credit requirement for the Major in IMT award is 79 credits made up by the following subjects and as set out under the “Major in IMT” column in Table 4.1: . 51 credits from the subjects categorized as COM (compulsory) . 15 credits from the subjects categorized as ELE (elective) . 4 credits from the subjects categorized as GE (General Education) . 6 credits from the subjects categorized as ELC (English Language) . 3 credits from the subject categorized as CBS (Chinese Language)
28.4 Eligibility for graduation with Major in IMT Award with / without a Minor Award
Students must satisfy the following requirements in order to graduate: (i) Credit requirement: . 79 credits required by the Major in IMT programme as stated in Section 28.3 . 18 credits required by the specific Minor programme or from subjects of any combination of disciplines (i.e. free electives) . A total of not less than 100 credits (if the credits required for the Major and Minor combination are less than 100, students must take extra credits from any level 1 to level 4 subjects to make up the total credit requirement of 100 credits) (ii) Achieves a GPA of not less than 2.0 (iii) Satisfies the residential requirement for at least 1/3 of the credits to be completed for the award the student is currently enrolled, unless the professional bodies stipulate otherwise. (iv) Fulfils the University Language requirements as set out in Section 4.2 (v) Achieves 5 credits categorized as TRN in Table 4.1 (vi) Achieves at least 1 WIE credit as set out in Section 8.2 (vii) Fulfils the requirement of co-curricular activities as set out in Section 9. (viii) Passes Foundation Mathematics (AMA106)
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
48 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
(It is only applicable to admittees who have not studied Foundation Year and who do not have a "pass" in the A-level Mathematics subject(s), and who have not been given credit transfer for the subject AMA227 stipulated in the curriculum. These students are required to take a mandatory Mathematics Benchmark Test (MBT) prior to the commencement of their studies. Those who pass the MBT are exempted from this graduation requirement and they follow the normal study pattern. Those who fail or do not attend the MBT are required to take a non-credit bearing subject AMA106 “Foundation Mathematics”, which is a pre-requisite for AMA227. A pass in AMA106 “Foundation Mathematics” is thus a graduation requirement for these students.)
28.5 Guidelines for Award Classification (Major / Minor Programme)
(i) For students who have completed a Major/Minor programme, a single classification will be awarded and their award classification will be based on both their "Major GPA" and "Minor GPA". For students who have completed a Major programme combined with free electives, their award classification will be determined by their "Major GPA" and the grades obtained in the free electives.
(ii) "Major GPA" is derived based on all subjects of the Major programme.
(iii) The "Major GPA" will be Weighted GPA to be derived by a mechanism same as that for the Weighted GPA for award classifications of students on the single- discipline degree (see Sections 27.1 to 27.3 above), except that there will be fewer subjects to be counted for the "Major GPA" due to the difference in the curriculum between a Major programme and a single-discipline degree.
(iv) "Minor GPA" is derived based on the 18 credits of Minor study (either a specific Minor or a free combination of electives). "Minor GPA" will be unweighted.
(v) The "Major GPA" and the "Minor GPA" will be presented separately to the Board of Examiners for consideration. The guidelines for determining award classification as stipulated in Sections 27.4 to 27.7 are applicable to Major/Minor studies.
(vi) In order to be eligible for a particular award classification, a student should have comparable standard of performance in both his Major and Minor studies.
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
49 Programme Booklet 2011/12 BSc(Hons) in Internet and Multimedia Technologies (42077)
(vii) In cases where the attainment of a student in the Minor study may warrant the granting of an award classification different from the one the student deserves for his Major study, the Board of Examiners has the discretion to recommend a classification which better reflects the student's performance on the Major study.
29. CURRICULUM MAP
(Please see pages 51 to 52.)
30. SYLLABI
(Please see pages 53 to 241.)
Department of Electronic and Information Engineering, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University
50 CURRICULUM MAP Alignment of Subjects with Programme Intended Learning Outcomes COMP436# COMP437# COMP407* CBS2080* EIE3109* AMA227* AMA228* EIE408# EIE414# EIE424# EIE426# EIE428# EIE429# EIE431# EIE432# EIE435# EIE210* EIE214* EIE226* EIE320* EIE328* EIE341* EIE342* EIE343* EIE345* EIE360* EIE430*
Programme Intended Learning Outcomes
1 Ability to identify the different aspects of Internet and multimedia systems
Ability to design, develop and implement digital systems related to Internet 2 and multimedia technologies
Ability to identify, analyze and solve technical problems related to Internet 3 and multimedia technologies
Ability to apply computer programming techniques to solve related 4 practical problems Ability to apply knowledge of mathematics and science appropriate to the 5 problems related to Internet and multimedia technologies
Ability to appreciate and identify factors/issues related to product/industrial 6 design
Ability to appreciate computer games’ designs and complexities; and 7 design, analyze, implement and evaluate computer games
8 Ability to appreciate and apply knowledge of information technologies
Ability to communicate effectively, and present ideas and findings clearly 9 in oral and written forms 10 Ability to understand the creative process
11 Ability to demonstrate self-learning and life-long learning capability
Ability to collaborate effectively with other members in a team, and 12 demonstrate leadership capability 13 Ability to recognize social responsibility and ethics
Note:
* Compulsory subject # Elective subject Supports this programme intended learning outcome
EIE Subject Title
EIE210 Electronics Design EIE214 Introduction to Logic Design EIE226 Introduction to Databases EIE320 Object-Oriented Design and Programming EIE328 Digital Signal Processing for Multimedia Applications EIE341 Signals and Systems EIE342 Computer Networks EIE343 Computer System Principles EIE345 Data Communication Technologies EIE360 Integrated Project EIE3109 Mobile Systems and Application Development EIE408 Principles of Virtual Reality EIE414 Computer Architecture and Systems EIE424 Distributed Systems and Networking Programming EIE426 Artificial Intelligence and Computer Vision EIE428 Multimedia Communications EIE429 Corporate Networking EIE430 Honours Project EIE431 Digital Video Production and Broadcasting EIE432 Web Systems and Technologies EIE435 Image and Audio Processing
Servicing Subject Title
AMA227 Mathematics I AMA228 Mathematics II CBS2080 Fundamentals of Chinese Communication COMP407 Computer Graphics COMP436 Middleware and Distributed Objects COMP437 Mobile Computing ELC2501 University English I ELC2502 University English II ELC3508 English for Effective Workplace Communication ENG224 Information Technology ENG236 Computer Programming IC291 Practical Training MM2021 Management and Organisation MM2711 Introduction to Marketing SD2492 Product Design and Social Considerations SD348 Introduction to Industrial Design SD3983 Computer Game Development II SD3984 Computer Game Development I
51 CURRICULUM MAP Alignment of Subjects with Programme Intended Learning Outcomes ELC2501* ELC2502* ELC3508* MM2021* MM2711* ENG224* ENG236* SD2492* SD3983* SD3984* SD348* IC291*
Programme Intended Learning Outcomes
1 Ability to identify the different aspects of Internet and multimedia systems
Ability to design, develop and implement digital systems related to Internet 2 and multimedia technologies
Ability to identify, analyze and solve technical problems related to Internet 3 and multimedia technologies
Ability to apply computer programming techniques to solve related 4 practical problems Ability to apply knowledge of mathematics and science appropriate to the 5 problems related to Internet and multimedia technologies
Ability to appreciate and identify factors/issues related to product/industrial 6 design
Ability to appreciate computer games’ designs and complexities; and 7 design, analyze, implement and evaluate computer games
8 Ability to appreciate and apply knowledge of information technologies
Ability to communicate effectively, and present ideas and findings clearly 9 in oral and written forms 10 Ability to understand the creative process
11 Ability to demonstrate self-learning and life-long learning capability
Ability to collaborate effectively with other members in a team, and 12 demonstrate leadership capability 13 Ability to recognize social responsibility and ethics
Note:
* Compulsory subject # Elective subject Supports this programme intended learning outcome
EIE Subject Title
EIE210 Electronics Design EIE214 Introduction to Logic Design EIE226 Introduction to Databases EIE320 Object-Oriented Design and Programming EIE328 Digital Signal Processing for Multimedia Applications EIE341 Signals and Systems EIE342 Computer Networks EIE343 Computer System Principles EIE345 Data Communication Technologies EIE360 Integrated Project EIE3109 Mobile Systems and Application Development EIE408 Principles of Virtual Reality EIE414 Computer Architecture and Systems EIE424 Distributed Systems and Networking Programming EIE426 Artificial Intelligence and Computer Vision EIE428 Multimedia Communications EIE429 Corporate Networking EIE430 Honours Project EIE431 Digital Video Production and Broadcasting EIE432 Web Systems and Technologies EIE435 Image and Audio Processing
Servicing Subject Title
AMA227 Mathematics I AMA228 Mathematics II CBS2080 Fundamentals of Chinese Communication COMP407 Computer Graphics COMP436 Middleware and Distributed Objects COMP437 Mobile Computing ELC2501 University English I ELC2502 University English II ELC3508 English for Effective Workplace Communication ENG224 Information Technology ENG236 Computer Programming IC291 Practical Training MM2021 Management and Organisation MM2711 Introduction to Marketing SD2492 Product Design and Social Considerations SD348 Introduction to Industrial Design SD3983 Computer Game Development II SD3984 Computer Game Development I
52 Subject Description Form
Subject Code ABCT102
Subject Title Foundation Biology
Credit Value 3
Level 1
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives The lectures aim to explain and discuss the knowledge of biology at foundation level which is essential to proceed to higher level of study in biology-related disciplines.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes 1. understand the basic features and functions of cells; 2. describe the basic structures and functions of body systems; 3. understand the fundamental features of microorganisms; and 4. understand the basic features of ecosystems.
Subject Synopsis/ Keyword Syllabus (Indicative): Indicative Syllabus 1. Cells • Structures and functions of the cell • Homeostasis and transport within the cell • Cellular respiration and photosynthesis • Cell reproduction - mitosis and meiosis 2. Genetics • Fundamentals of genetics • Nucleic acids and protein synthesis • Inheritance patterns • DNA technology 3. Body Functions • Organization of human tissues, organs and systems • Overview of physiological functions: Nervous system, cardiovascular system, respiratory system, digestive system, renal system, immune system, endocrine and reproductive systems 4. Microorganisms • Bacteria and viruses • Protozoa • Algae and fungi 5. Ecology • Introduction to ecology and populations
Teaching/ Learning The teaching and learning approach includes lectures which aim to enrich Methodology the knowledge and concepts of biology at foundation level. In addition, written assignments and tutorial sessions are also included for further consolidating the knowledge discussed in lectures. Students will be assessed by written assignments, quizzes and written examination.
53
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment Methods/Tasks % Weighting Intended Subject Learning Outcomes 1. Continuous Assessment 50% 2. Final Examination 50% Total 100%
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 32 Hours
• Tutorial 10 Hours
Total student study effort: 42 Hours
Reading List and Essential Reading: References 1. E. Eldon, C. Frederick and B. David, Concepts in Biology, 11th ed., McGraw-Hill, 2005.
Reference List:
1. S. Freeman, Biological Science, 2nd ed., Pearson Prentice-Hall, 2005.
54
Subject Description Form
Subject Code ABCT103
Subject Title Fundamental Chemistry
Credit Value 3
Level 1
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives This subject educates student with fundamental knowledge in chemistry. It is also a bridging course for students previously learned chemistry in a language other than English.
The subject aims to:
1. provide students with a broad fundamental knowledge in chemistry required for the study of science, technology, engineering or related programme; and 2. help student study chemistry effectively in an English-medium learning environment and to acquaint student with the necessary chemical vocabularies.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes 1. understand the fundamental principles of chemistry; 2. have sufficient chemical knowledge for their chosen field of study; and 3. understand and appreciate the chemical terms and principles that they may encounter in written and oral communication.
Subject Synopsis/ Keyword Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Atomic Structure Electromagnetic radiation, hydrogen spectrum, energy levels, electron spin, quantum numbers, dual properties of matter, wave function and probability, uncertainty principle, charge clouds of s, p, d and f orbits, radial distribution curves, electronic configurations of many-electron atoms, Pauli exclusion principle, Aufbau principle, ionization energy, electron affinity, electronegativity, atomic and ionic radii and periodicity.
2. Chemical Bonding Ionic bonds, covalent bonds, dative bonds, metallic bonds, van der Waals forces, hydrogen bonds, concepts of valance bond theory and hybridization, resonance, molecular shapes by VSEPR method, molecular orbital theory of homonuclear and heteronuclear diatomic molecules, multi- centre bonding in electron deficient molecules.
3. Properties of Solid Solids: amorphous solids, types of crystals, unit cell, co-ordination number, closest packing, crystal structures.
4. General Inorganic Chemistry Main group elements and their compounds.
5. General Organic Chemistry Simple concept of orbital hybridisation of carbon: sp, sp2 and sp3. Naming of compounds containing carbon chains and rings. Isomerism, regioisomer and optical isomer. A preliminary study of the functional group: alkane, alkene, alcohol, aldehyde, ketone, carboxylic acid, ester. Direct and simple functional group transformations.
55
Teaching/ Learning Lectures will provide students with general outlines of key concepts and Methodology guidance on further reading. Lectures will be further consolidated through assignments and tutorials. Students will be assessed by assignments, quizzes as well as an end-of-term written examination.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment Methods/Tasks % Weighting Intended Subject Learning Outcomes 1. Continuous Assessment 60% 2. Final Examination 40% Total 100%
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 36 Hours
• Tutorial 6 Hours
Other student study effort:
• Self-study 80 Hours
Total student study effort: 122 Hours
Reading List and Essential Reading: References 1. R. Chang, Chemistry, 7th ed., McGraw-Hill, 2002.
56
Subject Description Form
Subject Code AF1603
Subject Title Foundations of Economics
Credit Value 3
Level 1
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives This subject contributes to the achievement of the BBA Outcomes by enabling students to apply fundamental economic concepts to analysis of real world economic activities, and communicate effectively. It also requires students to work effectively with and through others.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes 1. explain the fundamental economic concepts. 2. use appropriate tools to apply the fundamental economic concepts to analysis real world situations. 3. evaluate basic economic data.
Subject Synopsis/ Keyword Syllabus (Indicative): Indicative Syllabus 1. What is economics? Scarcity and opportunity cost, The role of the market, Positive and normative, Relation with other subject disciplines. 2. Demand and supply analysis Determinants of the demand curve, Determinants of the supply curve, Market equilibrium. 3. Perfect competition The quest of profits and the equilibrium in a competitive market. 4. The income and output of nations National income accounting, output determination, Economic growth, fiscal policy and aggregate demand, monetary policy and aggregate demand. 5. Inflation and Unemployment The causes and costs of inflation, the causes and costs of unemployment. 6. International Trade Exchange rates and the balance of payments, Foreign trade and output determination
Teaching/ Learning Lectures will introduce the fundamental economic concepts, with specific Methodology reference to the analysis on common economic activities.
Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures. The activities in tutorials include student presentations and discussions of problems sets.
57
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment Methods/Tasks % Weighting Intended Subject Learning Outcomes 1. Continuous 50% 2. Final Examination 50% Total 100%
The ability to explain fundamental economic concepts and use appropriate tools to apply them in real world situations will be assessed in a quiz and a final examination. Evaluation of basic economic data, effective communication and the ability to work with others are assessed in the Group presentation and the discussion of problem sets.
Minimum Pass Grade: Coursework D Final Examination D
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 28 Hours
• Tutorial 14 Hours
Total student study effort: 42 Hours
Reading List and Indicative Reading: References 1. Stanley L. Brue and Campbell R. Mcconnell, Essentials of Economics, 1st ed., McGraw-Hill, U.S.A, 2007.
58
Subject Description Form
Subject Code AMA103
Subject Title Foundation Mathematics I for Science and Engineering
Credit Value 3
Level 1
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives This is a subject to provide students with knowledge required for the understanding and application of mathematical concepts and techniques and to develop students’ ability for logical thinking and for extending their knowledge to solve problems different from the examples.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes 1. State the definitions, theorems, concepts and techniques; 2. Solve problems resembling to examples; 3. Solve harder problems which need matured skills, which are indirectly related to the delivered knowledge, or which need knowledge from different topics.
Subject Synopsis/ Keyword Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Basic Concepts Mathematical induction; Functions and inverse functions; Elementary functions, trigonometric functions; Complex numbers; De Moivre’s Theorem; Roots of a complex number. 2. Differential Calculus Limits and continuity; Derivatives; Techniques of differentiation; Mean value Theorem; Higher derivatives; Maxima and minima; Curve sketching. 3. Integral Calculus Definite and indefinite integrals; Fundamental Theorem of Calculus; Techniques of integration; Taylor’s Theorem; Applications in geometry, physics and engineering.
Teaching/ Learning The Lectures aim to deliver and to explain the concepts, theories and Methodology techniques. Revision and doing exercises at home is encouraged to enhance learning. Tutorials aim to solve the difficult exercises which the students cannot solve by themselves.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment Methods/Tasks % Weighting Intended Subject Learning Outcomes 1. Continuous Assessment 40% 2. Final Examination 60% Total 100%
Continuous Assessment comprises of assignments and tests. A written examination is held at the end of the semester.
To pass this subject, students are required to obtain Grade D or above in both the Continuous Assessment and the Examination components.
59
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 28 Hours
• Tutorial and Student Presentation 14 Hours
Total student study effort: 42 Hours
Reading List and Textbook: References 1. K.F. Hung and T.Y. Pong, Foundation Mathematics, McGraw-Hill, 2008.
Reference List:
1. D. Varberg, E.J. Purcell and S.E. Rigdon, Calculus, 8th ed., Prentice-Hall, 2000. 2. F.R. Giordano, M.D. Weir and R.L. Finney, Calculus for Engineers and Scientists, Addison-Wesley, 1988.
60
Subject Description Form
Subject Code AMA104
Subject Title Foundation Mathematics II for Science and Engineering
Credit Value 3
Level 1
Pre-requisite AMA103 Foundation Mathematics I for Science and Engineering
Co-requisite/ Nil Exclusion
Objectives This subject aims to provide students with an integrated knowledge required for the understanding and application of mathematical concepts and techniques and to develop students’ ability for logical thinking for extending their knowledge to solve problems different from examples.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes 1. apply the concepts of convergence and divergence of series and to apply Taylor’s expansions in solving numerical problems; 2. use the methods in matrices and linear equations in problem solving; 3. apply the techniques of statistics to model and solve problems in science and engineering.
Subject Synopsis/ Keyword Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Infinite Series Convergence of series, including tests for convergence; power series; Taylor expansions of functions; applications.
2. Linear Algebra Matrices and determinants; Systems of linear equations.
3. Probability and Statistics: Descriptive statistics; Frequency distribution; Mean, median and mode; Variance and standard deviation; Probability; Discrete and continuous random variables; Normal distribution.
Teaching/ Learning The subject will be delivered mainly through lectures and tutorials. The Methodology lectures aim to provide the students with an integrated knowledge required for the understanding and application of mathematical concepts and techniques. Tutorials will mainly be used to develop students’ problem solving ability.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment Methods/Tasks % Weighting Intended Subject Learning Outcomes 1. Continuous Assessment 40% 2. Final Examination 60% Total 100%
Continuous Assessment comprises of assignments and a mid-term test. A final examination is held at the end of the semester.
Questions used in assignments, mid-term test and examination are used to assess the student's level of understanding of the basic concepts and their
61
ability to use mathematical techniques in solving problems in science and engineering.
To pass this subject, students are required to obtain Grade D or above in both the Continuous Assessment and the Examination components.
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 28 Hours
• Tutorial and Student Presentation 14 Hours
Total student study effort: 42 Hours
Reading List and Textbook: References 1. S. Ross, A First Course in Probability, 8th ed., Pearson Prentice-Hall, 2009.
Reference List:
1. K.F. Hung and T.Y. Pong, Foundation Mathematics, McGraw-Hill, 2008.
62
Subject Description Form
Subject Code AMA105
Subject Title Logic : Qualitative and Quantitative
Credit Value 3
Level 1
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives This subject aims to develop students’ ability in logical and analytical thinking through the qualitative and quantitative aspects of logic. The first part will emphasize qualitative logic and will be taught by the General Education Centre. The objective of this part is to relate formal logic to arguments expressed in natural language, with special emphasis on how to evaluate arguments critically with the help of logic. The second part will emphasize quantitative logic. Some topics from discrete mathematics will be presented as illustrations of the general theory. This part will be taught by the Department of Applied Mathematics.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes 1. demonstrate basic logical reasoning 2. translate arguments in natural language to the language of formal logic and then evaluate whether the arguments are valid or not with the help of logical analysis 3. apply logical reasoning in both everyday and academic situations 4. recognize and refute common logical fallacies 5. appreciate the axiomatic approach in mathematics 6. analyze and appreciate why proofs of mathematical statements work 7. apply logical reasoning in problem solving
Subject Synopsis/ Keyword Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Qualitative Logic Introduction – What is Logic? Logic Puzzles. Some Basic Concepts and Logical Relations. Propositional Logic. Syllogistic Logic. Inductive Reasoning. Some Common Informal Fallacies. 2. Quantitative Logic Sets and propositions; Relations and Functions; Natural Numbers, Integers and Rational Numbers.
Teaching/ Learning 1. Qualitative Logic Methodology Introduction to the key concepts and basic principles of formal logic will be done primarily through lectures. Emphasis will be put on practical applications of these concepts and principles in everyday life, drawing updated examples from newspapers, magazines and everyday discourses and arguments, sometimes with video clips taken from television.
Small group tutorials will be devoted to discussion of exercises and/or case studies relevant to the key concepts and basic principles introduced in the lectures. Finally, self-study will be encouraged through extra exercises which are computer-based and accessible to students. Assessment will be in the form of in-class mid-term tests as well as exercises or group projects associated with tutorials.
All exercises and case-studies are designed to help students achieve at
63
least one of the intended learning outcomes; whereas the tests and the examination are designed to assess whether students have achieved all the learning outcomes as a whole.
2. Quantitative Logic A two hour mass lecture will be conducted each week to initiate students into the ideas, concepts and techniques of the topics in the syllabus, which is then reinforced by a one hour tutorial designed to consolidate and develop students’ knowledge through discussion and practical problem solving.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment Methods/Tasks % Weighting Intended Subject Learning Outcomes 1. Continuous Assessment 40% 2. Final Examination 60% Total 100%
Continuous Assessment comprises of exercises/case studies, in-class/on- line quizzes and tests. A 2-hour examination is held at the end of the
semester.
Questions in the exercises, tests and examination are set to test students’ ability with regard to any one of the intended learning outcomes.
To pass this subject, students are required to obtain Grade D or above in both the Continuous Assessment and the Examination components.
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 28 Hours
• Tutorial 14 Hours
Total student study effort: 42 Hours
Reading List and Textbook: References Qualitative Logic 1. K.P. Yu, Logic: The First Art, McGraw-Hill, Singapore, 2006.
Quantitative Logic 2. K.T. Leung and Doris L.C. Chen, Elementary set theory, Hong Kong University Press, 1981.
Reference List: 1. H. Gensler, Introduction to Logic, Routledge, New York, 2002. 2. A.Fisher, Critical Thinking, OUP, Cambridge, 2001. 3. I.M. Copi and C. Cohen, Introduction to Logic, 11th ed., Macmillan, New York, 2002. 4. D.L. Johnson, Elements of Logic via Numbers and Sets, 2nd ed., Springer, 2001. 5. P.J. Hurley, A Concise Introduction to Logic, 7th ed., Wadsworth Publishing Co., Belmont, 1999. 6. S. Guttenplan, The Languages of Logic: An introduction to formal logic, 2nd ed., Basil Blackwell, Oxford, 1997. 7. W.C. Salmon, Logic, 3rd ed., Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, 1984. 8. W. Hodges, Logic, 2nd ed., Harmondsworth, 2006. 9. C.L. Liu, Elements of Discrete Mathematics, 2nd ed., McGraw-Hill, 1985. 10. A. Cupillari, The Nuts and Bolts of Proofs, 2nd ed., Academic Press, 2001. 11. I.N. Herstein, Topics in Algebra, 2nd ed., Xerox Corp., 1975
64
12. K. Hrbacek and T. Jech, Introduction to set theory, 2nd revised and expanded ed., Marcel Dekker Inc., 1984
65
Subject Description Form
Subject Code AMA106
Subject Title Foundation Mathematics
Credit Value 0
Level 1
Pre-requisite / Co- Nil requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives This is a subject to provide students with a solid foundation in Mathematics. The emphasis will be on the application of mathematical methods to solving basic mathematical problems.
Intended Learning Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Outcomes 1. solve problems using the concept of functions and inverse functions; 2. apply the basic operations of matrices and calculate the determinant; 3. apply mathematical reasoning to analyse essential features of different mathematical problems such as differentiation and integration; 4. apply appropriate mathematical techniques to model and solve problems in science and engineering; 5. extend their knowledge of mathematical techniques and adapt known solutions in different situations.
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Basic concepts Functions and inverse functions; Elementary functions, Trigonometric functions.
2. Differential Calculus Limits and continuity (intuitive approach); Derivatives; Techniques of differentiation; Mean Value Theorem; Higher derivatives; Maxima and minima; Curve sketching.
3. Integral Calculus Indefinite integrals; Techniques of integration; Definite integrals. Fundamental Theorem of Calculus; Taylor’s Theorem; Applications in geometry, physics and engineering.
4. Matrix Algebra Introduction to matrices and determinants.
Teaching/Learning The subject will be delivered mainly through lectures, tutorials and Methodology presentation. The lectures aim to provide students with an integrated knowledge required for the understanding and application of mathematical concepts and techniques. Tutorials and presentations will be held to develop students’ ability of logical thinking and effective communication.
66
Assessment Methods in Alignment with Specific assessment % Intended subject learning Intended Learning methods/tasks weighting outcomes to be assessed Outcomes (Please tick as appropriate)
1 2 3 4 5
1. Assignment and Mid-term 40% Test
2. Examination 60%
Total 100 %
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Continuous Assessment comprises of assignments and a mid-term test. A written examination is held at the end of the semester.
Questions used in assignments, tests and examinations are set to test students’ ability with regard to any one of the intended learning outcomes.
To pass this subject, students are required to obtain Grade D or above in both the Continuous Assessment and the Examination components.
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected . Lecture 28 Hours
. Tutorial and Student Presentation 14 Hours
Other student study effort:
. Assignment 20 Hours
. Self-study 58 Hours
Total student study effort: 120 Hours
Reading List and Textbook: References 1. K.C. Chung, A Short Course in Calculus and Matrices, McGraw-Hill, 2008.
References:
1. K.F. Hung, Wilson C.K. Kwan and Glory T.Y. Pong, Foundation Mathematics, McGraw-Hill, 2011.
67 Subject Description Form
Subject Code AP101
Subject Title College Physics I
Credit Value 3
Level 1
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives This is the first bridging course in physics of the Foundation Programme for students admitted from mainland. It provides a broad foundation in mechanics and thermal physics, preparing students to study science, engineering, or related programmes.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes 1. solve simple problems in single-particle mechanics using calculus and vectors; 2. solve problems in mechanics of many-particle systems using calculus and vectors; 3. solve problems on rotation of rigid body about fixed axis; 4. define simple harmonic motion and solve simple problems; 5. explain ideal gas laws in terms of kinetic theory; 6. apply the first law of thermodynamics to simple processes; 7. solve simple problems related to the Carnot cycle; 8. solve simple problems in travelling waves; 9. explain the formation of acoustical standing waves and beats; and 10. use Doppler’s effect to explain changes in frequency received.
Subject Synopsis/ Keyword Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Preparation in Mathematics Review of algebra, geometry and trigonometry; Function and graph; Derivative; Integration; Vectors and coordinate system.
2. Mechanics Calculus-based kinematics, dynamics and Newton’s laws; Calculus- based Newtonian mechanics, involving the application of impulse, momentum, work and energy, etc.; Conservation law; Gravitation field; Systems of particles; Collisions; Rigid body; Rotation; Angular momentum; Oscillations and simple harmonic motion; Pendulum; Statics and elasticity.
3. Thermal Physics Conduction, convection and radiation; Black body radiation and energy quantization; Ideal gas and kinetic theory; Work, heat and internal energy; First law of thermodynamics; Entropy and the second law of thermodynamics; Carnot cycle; Heat engine and refrigerators.
4. Waves Longitudinal and transverse waves; Travelling wave; Doppler effect; Acoustics.
Teaching/ Learning 1. Lectures are given to deliver the subject outline and key physics Methodology concepts to the students. The students will also get the guidance on further reading.
2. Assignments are used to help the students gain analytical abilities through problem-solving and also to help them strengthen the concepts
68
taught.
3. Laboratories are designed to help the students gain hands-on experience in the operation of equipment and apply their knowledge in the experiments.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment Methods/Tasks % Weighting Intended Subject Learning Outcomes 1. Continuous Assessment 40% 2. Examination 60% Total 100%
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 34 Hours
• Laboratory 8 Hours
Other student study effort: • Multimedia teaching/learning and other activities – 12 Hours Virtual Laboratory • Multimedia teaching/learning and other activities – 60 Hours Self-study
Total student study effort: 114 Hours
Reading List and Essential Reading and CD-ROM: References 1. Young and Freedman, University Physics, Volume 2, 12th ed., Pearson, 2007. 2. Physics CAI in CD-ROM, USTC, 2000. 3. Computer Simulation System for College Physics Experiment, Version 2.0 for Windows, USTC, 2000.
Reference List:
1. Halliday, Resnick and Walker, Fundamentals of Physics, 7th ed., Wiley, 2005. 2. Jewett and Serway (2008), Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics, Volume 1, 7th ed., Cengage Learning, 2008. 3. Giancoli, Physics for Scientists and Engineer, 3rd ed., Prentice-Hall, 2000. 4. Giambattista, Richardson and Richardson, College Physics, 2nd ed., McGraw-Hill, 2007. 5. Jewett and Serway, Serway’s, Principles of Physic, 4th ed., Thomson, 2006. 6. Knight, Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics, Pearson, 2004.
69
Subject Description Form
Subject Code AP102
Subject Title College Physics II
Credit Value 3
Level 1
Pre-requisite AP101 College Physics I
Co-requisite/ Nil Exclusion
Objectives This is the second bridging course in physics of the Foundation Programme for students admitted from mainland. It is built on College Physics I and continues on topics in waves and optics, electromagnetism and modern physics, in preparing students to study science, engineering, or related programmes.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes 1. apply simple laws in optics to explain image formation; 2. explain phenomena related to the wave character of light; 3. define electrostatic field and potential; 4. use Gauss’ law in solving problems in electrostatics; 5. solve problems on interaction between current and magnetic field; 6. apply electromagnetic induction to various phenomena; and 7. solve simple problems in AC circuits.
Subject Synopsis/ Keyword Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Waves and Optics Reflection and refraction; Image formation by mirrors and lenses; Compound lens; Microscope and telescope; Superposition of waves; Huygen’s principle; Interference and diffraction; Interferometers and diffraction grating; Polarization; Wave-particle duality.
2. Electromagnetism Charge and field; Coulomb’s law and Gauss’ law; Electrostatic field and potential difference; Capacitors and dielectric; Current and resistance; Ohm’s law; Electromotive force, potential difference and RC circuits; Magnetic force on moving charges and current; Hall effect; Biot-Savart law and Ampere’s law; Faraday’s law and Lenz’s law; Self inductance and mutual inductance; Transformers; AC circuits and applications.
Teaching/ Learning 1. Lectures are given to deliver the subject outline and key physics Methodology concepts to the students. The students will also get the guidance on further reading.
2. Assignments are used to help the students gain analytical abilities through problem-solving and also to help them strengthen the concepts taught.
3. Laboratories are designed to help the students gain hands-on experience in the operation of equipment and apply their knowledge in the experiments.
70
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment Methods/Tasks % Weighting Intended Subject Learning Outcomes 1. Continuous Assessment 40% 2. Examination 60% Total 100%
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 34 Hours
• Laboratory 8 Hours
Other student study effort: • Multimedia teaching/learning and other activities – 12 Hours Virtual Laboratory • Multimedia teaching/learning and other activities – 60 Hours Self-study
Total student study effort: 114 Hours
Reading List and Essential Reading and CD-ROM: References 1. Jewett and Serway, Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics, Volume 2, 7th ed., Cengage Learning, 2008.
Reference List:
1. Giancoli, Physics for Scientists and Engineers, 3rd ed., Prentice-Hall, 2000. 2. Young and Freedman, University Physics, 12th ed., Pearson, 2007. 3. Halliday, Resnick and Walker, Fundamentals of Physics, 7th ed., Wiley, 2005. 4. Giambattista, Richardson and Richardson, College Physics, 2nd ed., MaGraw-Hill, 2007.
71
Subject Description Form
Subject Code APSS184
Subject Title Understanding the Hong Kong Community
Credit Value 3
Level 1
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives The subject aims to provide the students with an integrated knowledge required for the understanding and application of sociological concepts to understand the social and cultural development of Hong Kong.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes 1. understand and describe the historical development, social life, and cultural trajectory of colonial and post-colonial Hong Kong; and 2. analyze the social, cultural and political aspect of colonial and post-colonial Hong Kong.
Subject Synopsis/ Keyword Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Pre-1841 Hong Kong: Wall Communities and the Form of Living. 2. Domestic Villages and the Survival Strategies. 3. 1841: The Coming of the Colonial Hong Kong. 4. The Chinese Communities. 5. Post-1950’s Hong Kong: the Minimally Integrated Social and Political System. 6. The Development and the Future of Social Service in Hong Kong. 7. Modern City Life of Hong Kong: Shopping Malls 8. Residence Patterns of Hong Kong People: Public Housing and Home Ownership. 9. Landscape of Hong Kong: Disney World, Tourism and Economic Development. 10. Hong Kong’s Tomorrow.
Students will also have to participate in field visits which introduce them to various aspects of the traditional and modern social lives in Hong Kong. They are encouraged to focus on the cultural and social aspects of Hong Kong society. Appropriate sites for visit may include: Market at Yuen Long, Fanling and Sheung Shui; Tai O- a fishing Village, Central and Sheung Wan: Wan Cha; Hong Kong Museum of History and etc.
Teaching/ Learning Apart from the lectures, students would participate in outings by which they are Methodology introduced to, on the one hand, the historic sites that could exhibit the traditional social lives of Hong Kong people, and on the other the modern landscapes of Hong Kong. In addition, students are required to attend seminars and present their views on various aspects of the traditional and modern social lives in Hong Kong. Students are encouraged to focus on the cultural and social aspects of Hong Kong society.
72
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment Methods/Tasks % Weighting Intended Subject Learning Outcomes Continuous Assessment • Individual term paper on social/cultural life of HK 30% • Participation (lecture/seminar/fieldtrip) 40% • Group presentation 30% Total 100%
Student Study Class contact (time-tabled): Effort Expected • Lecture 24 Hours
• Seminar 18 Hours
Total student study effort: 42 Hours
Reading List and Reference List: References 1. J.W. Cody and J.R. Richardson, Urbanizing Forest and Village Trees in Hong Kong's Shatin Valley, 1976-1997, Traditional Dwellings and Settlements Review, 9: 21-33, 1997. 2. A. Ku, Narratives, Politics, and the Public Sphere: Struggles over Political Reform in the Final Transitional Years in Hong Kong (1992-1994), Aldershot, Brookfield USA, Ashgate, Chapter 2, pp. 18-48, 1999. 3. B.K.P. Leung, Perspectives on Hong Kong Society, Hong Kong: Oxford University Press, 1996. 4. S.K. Lau, et al., Indicators of Social Development: Hong Kong, Hong Kong: Hong Kong Chinese University Press, Various Years. 5. B.K.P. Leung, Social Issues in Hong Kong, Hong Kong: Oxford University Press, 1990. 6. The Other Hong Kong Report, Hong Kong: Hong Kong Chinese University Press, Various Years. 7. 蔡榮芳,《香港人之香港史：1841-1945》, 香港, 牛津大學出版社, 2001. 8. 王宏志,《歷史的沉重：從香港看中國大陸的香港史論述》, 香港, 牛津大學 出版社, 2000. 9. 呂大樂,《唔該，埋單！》, "I.故事": 17-46, 1997. 10. 陳冠中,《香港未完成的實驗》: 23-30, 2001. 11. 陳填慶編,《諸神嘉年華: 香港宗教研究》, 香港: 牛津大學出版社, 2002. 12. 潘毅、余麗文（編）,《書寫城市: 香港的身份與文化》, 香港, 牛津大學出版 社, 2003. 13. 謝均才（編）, 《我們的地方，我們的時間: 香港社會新編》, 香港, 牛津大學 出版社, 2002.
73
Subject Description Form
Subject Code APSS185
Subject Title Discovering Psychology
Credit Value 3
Level 1
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives To enable students to:
1. acquire foundational understanding of major psychological theories and their relations to everyday life; and 2. clarify myths and facts about psychology through exploring different psychological specializations.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes 1. develop clear understanding of essentials of psychology; and 2. appreciate the diverse applications of psychological concepts and research findings to real-world problems and challenges.
Subject Synopsis/ Keyword Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Discovering Major Psychological Perspectives and Their Contributions.
2. Exploring Diversity of Psychological Specializations. • Biological Psychology: brain’s building, nervous system and human behaviour • Cognitive Psychology: snapshots of memory, thinking and creativity • Developmental Psychology: life-span human development (from newborn to old age) • Psychology of Gender and Sexuality: psychology of men and women, theories of love and interpersonal attraction • Personality Psychology: major personality types and assessment • Health Psychology: stress and coping strategies • Abnormal Psychology: basic perspectives of abnormality and major therapies • Social Psychology: social perception, attitudes, social and group influence • Industrial and Organizational Psychology: work motivation and leadership • Consumer Psychology: advertising and conditioning, consumer behavioural patterns • Chinese Psychology: application of psychological theories in Chinese culture
Over the past decades, psychology as an integrated discipline of social sciences, arts and science, has become increasingly popular. This subject is designed to provide students with essential psychological concepts and their applications in everyday life. Students are encouraged to explore salient and interesting features of specializations of psychology in a student-friendly format, including: an overview of major theories of psychology and their contributions, brain and human behaviour (biological psychology), snapshots of memory, thinking and creativity (cognitive psychology), life-span approach to human development (developmental psychology), psychology of gender and sexuality, major personality theories and assessment (psychology of personality), concepts of abnormality and major therapies (abnormal psychology), stress
74
and coping (health psychology), social cognition and influence (social psychology), work motivation and styles of leadership (industrial / organizational psychology), and application of psychological theories in Chinese culture (Chinese Psychology).
Teaching/ Learning The learning and teaching approach is characterized by active experiential Methodology learning, which encourages students to master psychological concepts through interactive lectures, small group discussions, and interaction with web-assisted learning and teaching materials. This learn-by-doing focus engages students through active class participation, seminar discussion, group project, and quiz.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment Methods/Tasks % Weighting Intended Subject Learning Outcomes Continuous Assessment • Class and Seminar Participation 10% • Quiz 30%
• Individual Seminar Presentation or Reflection 30% Paper • Group Project Presentation and Report 30% Total 100%
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 28 Hours
• Seminar 14 Hours
Total student study effort: 42 Hours
Reading List and Essential Reading: References 1. W. Weiten, Psychology. Themes & Variations, 8th ed., California: Brooks and Cole, 2010
Reference List:
1. D.A. Bernstein, L.A. Penner, A. Clarke-Stewart & E.J. Roy, Psychology, Boston, MA: Houghton Mifflin (with CD-ROM), 2006. 2. K.S. Feldman, Understanding Psychology, New York: McGraw-Hill, 2005. 3. D. Kardas, Psychology Resources on the World Wide Web, Belmont, CA: Wadsworth / Thomson Learning (with CD-ROM), 2000. 4. J.S. Nevid, Psychology: Concepts and Applications, Boston, MA: Houghton Mifflin (with CD-ROM & Film DVD/VHS), 2007. 5. R. Plotnik, Introduction to Psychology, Belmont, CA: Wadsworth / Thomson Learning (with CD-ROM), 2006. 6. S.E. Wood & E.R. Greenwood, The World of Psychology, Boston, NY: Ally & Bacon, 2002. 7. 丹尼斯 · 庫恩著、鄭钢 等(譯), 《心理學導論 —— 思想與行為的認識之 路》, 北京: 中國輕工業出版社, 2003. 8. 高尚仁 (主編), 《心理學新論》,香港：商務印書館, 1996, 2002. 9. 葉重新, 《心理學》, 台北：心理出版社, 2004.
75
Subject Description Form
Subject Code COMP100
Subject Title Introduction to Information Technology
Credit Value 3
Level 1
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives This subject provides students with the basic concepts of information technology and computing, as well as knowledge and practice on deploying and controlling common information technology applications. This subject is suitable for all students as a first subject in information technology, whether they intend to continue to study information technology or not. Students who intend to study information technology-related programmes are strongly recommended to take both COMP100 and COMP111.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes 1. understand how a computer works; 2. understand the potentials of information technologies in business and industry; 3. use popular operating systems to carry out sequence of tasks; 4. appreciate the power of programmed computer operation; 5. understand the current trends in the development of popular information technologies such as the Internet and related tools; and 6. appreciate IT-related intellectual property issues and their protection.
Subject Synopsis/ Keyword Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction to Computer Systems Major components of computer systems: central processing units, storage devices and media, inputs / outputs; working principle of computers; contemporary types of CPU, memory, input / output devices currently in use.
2. System Software Functions and operations of system software; basic features and commands of MS Windows and Unix / Linux; script language and task control.
3. Communication, Multimedia and the Internet Communication and networking; Internet resources and tools; multimedia information creation and application.
4. IT Applications Introduce typical applications of information technologies such as office automation, knowledge management, education, entertainment, digital edutainment, manufacturing, geo- informatics, bio-informatics, etc.
5. Inside IT Applications Role of programming in IT applications, e.g. shell programs, macros in Excel, robotic control concept of algorithm and programming, debugging.
6. IT Intellectual Property Security, privacy and ethics with software; copyright and patent law; trade secrets and registered design.
76
Teaching/ Learning The course material will be delivered as a combination of mass lectures and Methodology small group supervised laboratory sessions. Students will get familiarized with common operating systems and environment, internet and multimedia tools. They will also attempt to use basic office automation tools such as word processing, spreadsheet, and simple database operations.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment Methods/Tasks % Weighting Intended Subject Learning Outcomes Continuous Assessment 100% Total 100%
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 14 Hours
• Laboratory 42 Hours
Total student study effort: 56 Hours
Reading List and Reference List: References 1. G.B. Shelly, T.J. Cashman and M. Vermaat, Discovering Computers 2005, Thomson Course Technology, 2005. 2. G.B. Shelly, T.J. Cashman and M. Vermaat, Office 2003, Course One and Course Two (2 volumes), Thomson Centre Technology, 2004. 3. P. Toliver, Y. Johnson and S. Wise, The Select Series: Microsoft Office XP. Volume 1, Prentice-Hall, 2002. 4. L.E. Long and N. Long, Computers, 12th ed., Prentice-Hall, 2005.
77
Subject Description Form
Subject Code COMP102
Subject Title Enterprise Information Technology
Credit Value 3
Level 1
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives This subject provides students with the concept of information systems and their role in today’s enterprises. This subject can be taken with or without having taken COMP100 as a pre-requisite. It is suitable for all students.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes 1. understand the use of information systems at various organizational levels; 2. understand the basic principles of the modelling, storage, retrieval and management of information in an enterprise; 3. appreciate the use of strategic information systems for competitive advantages; and 4. understand ethical and social implications of information systems.
Subject Synopsis/ Keyword Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Basic Principles of Databases Data, information and knowledge; modelling and storage of information in databases; querying and retrieval of data; transaction processing.
2. More Advanced Manipulation and Management of Information The principles and applications of data warehousing, data mining, and knowledge management in an enterprise.
3. Decision Support for Business Intelligence Decision and executive support systems; business intelligence technologies such as expert systems, genetic algorithms for organizational modelling, neural networks and fuzzy logic for business applications; hands-on experience in using tools such as SPSS, data mining tool, neural network engine.
4. Electronic Commerce/Business Business use of the Internet, world wide web, intranets and extranets; electronic banking; cyber trading and investing; marketing on the internet; smart card trends, development methods and tools; security and cryptography.
5. Networked Enterprise Managing cooperative work environments; workflow and business process engineering; groupware and platforms for collaborative work, e.g. Novell.
6. Knowledge Management Concepts Corporate memory, intellectual capital, personal knowledge management, knowledge transfer, business intelligence.
Teaching/ Learning Lectures for delivery of conceptual knowledge and analytical techniques in Methodology case studies.
Tutorials/Laboratories for discussion of real business cases and hands-on
78
experience of tools and databases.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment Methods/Tasks % Weighting Intended Subject Learning Outcomes 1. Continuous Assessment 60% 2. Examination 40% Total 100%
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 28 Hours
• Tutorial/Laboratory 14 Hours
Total student study effort: 42 Hours
Reading List and Reference List: References 1. J. O’Brien, Introduction to Information Systems: Essential for the Business Enterprise, 13th ed., McGraw-Hill, 2007. 2. K.C. Laudon, et.al., Management Information Systems: Managing the Digital Firm, 9th ed., Prentice-Hall, 2006. 3. J. O’Brien, Management Information Systems: Managing Information Technology in the Business Enterprise, 7th ed., McGraw-Hill, 2006. 4. D.S. Linthicum, Enterprise Application Integration, Addison-Wesley, 2000. 5. A. Silberschatz, H.F. Korth and S. Sudarshan, Database System Concepts, 5th ed., McGraw-Hill. 6. Shelly, Cashman and Serwatka, Business Data Communications: Introductory Concepts and Techniques, 4th ed., Course Technology/Thomson Learning, 2004.
79
Subject Description Form
Subject Code COMP111
Subject Title Information Technology Systems
Credit Value 3
Level 1
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives This subject provides the students with the foundations of information systems, and basic methods of problem-solving with computer-based tools. It can be taken with or without having taken COMP100. Students who intend to study information technology-related programmes are strongly recommended to take both COMP100 and COMP111.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes 1. understand underlying principles of computer organization; 2. solve simple problems with computer-based tolls involving programming, algorithms and other technologies; and 3. be able to control and be aware of the opportunities and limitations provided by ready-made tools and software.
Subject Synopsis/ Keyword Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Fundamental Concepts Computer logic and organization, binary number representation and manipulation, modern computer architectures and trends, computer cluster, supercomputer, the computational grid.
2. System Software Operating system concepts, basic software development methods and tools, programming language, compiler, project management (Unix make file), debugger.
3. Basic Programming Basic C programming, simple data types, expression, control structure, structured data types, I/O, files.
4. Basic Algorithm and Problem Solving Problem solving procedure and tool, flowchart, pseudo-code, simple algorithms like linear search and bubble sort, implication on program execution time.
5. Data Communication, the Internet, and the World Wide Web Networking concepts; TCP/IP and Novell; features of Internet and Internet address, mobile computing.
6. Problem Solving with Computer-based Tools Integration of different computer-based technologies such as system software, application software, databases, networking, and mobile technologies to solve real-world problems.
Teaching/ Learning Lectures for delivery of conceptual knowledge and problem solving Methodology techniques.
Tutorials/Laboratory for discussions, hands-on programming and implementation of solutions.
80
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment Methods/Tasks % Weighting Intended Subject Learning Outcomes 1. Continuous Assessment 60% 2. Examination 40% Total 100%
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 28 Hours
• Laboratory 28 Hours
Total student study effort: 56 Hours
Reading List and Reference List: References 1. P.K. Andersen, Just Enough UNIX, McGraw-Hill, 2003. 2. H.M. Deital and P.J. Deital, C How to Program, 5th ed., Prentice-Hall, 2005. 3. M. Poniatowski, UNIX User’s Handbook, 2/E. Prentice-Hall PTR, 2002. 4. J. McMullen, UNIX User’s Interactive Workbook, Prentice-Hall PTR, 1999. 5. R. Cowart and B. Knittel, Using Microsoft Windows XP Professional, Special ed., Que, 2003. 6. B.K. Williams and S.C. Sawyer, Using Information Technology, McGraw- Hill, 2007. 7. A. Evans, K. Martin and M.A. Poatsy, Technology in Action, 4th ed., Pearson Prentice-Hall, 2008.
81
Subject Description Form
Subject Code ELC1003
Subject Title Extended Writing Skills
Credit Value 3
Level 1
Pre-requisite ELC1004 English for University Studies I
Co-requisite/ Nil Exclusion
Objectives This subject aims to further develop students’ competence in written communication in academic contexts and to enhance their ability to communicate effectively in an English-medium learning environment. The main emphasis of the subject is on enhancing students’ confidence and their competence in the use of grammar, vocabulary and academic writing conventions.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes 1. organize, write and revise academic essays and project reports; 2. organize and write correspondence to request assistance for study- related work; and 3. participate effectively in discussions.
Subject Synopsis/ Keyword Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus The learning outcomes will focus on the use of grammar and vocabulary in the writing of a variety of text types. Activities to enhance speaking and listening skills will be integrated into the interactive and project-based work throughout the course.
1. Appropriateness and accuracy of vocabulary and grammar Collocation and connotation of words; verb forms, prepositions and complex sentences.
2. Coherence and cohesion in writing Paragraph development; topicalisation and thematisation; cohesive devices including articles, determiners, connectives, pronouns and anaphoric references.
3. Logical development in writing Organisation in a variety of text types; selection of information; logical development of themes and topics.
4. Language development and independent learning strategies Self-access study tools such as online dictionaries, thesauruses and web concordancers to enhance language proficiency and develop vocabulary; independent language learning strategies such as the use of learning portfolios.
Teaching/ Learning The study method is primarily seminar-based and interactive learning Methodology techniques will be employed in activities such as discussions, role-plays and individual and group activities. Information technology will be employed to facilitate the learning and application of writing skills and online writing tools.
82
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment Methods/Tasks % Weighting Intended Subject Learning Outcomes Continuous Assessment 100% Total 100%
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected Seminar 42 Hours
Total student study effort: 42 Hours
Reading List and Reference List: References 1. D. Bunton, Common English Errors in Hong Kong, Hong Kong: Longman, 1989. 2. R. Carter, R. Hughes and M. McCarthy, Exploring Grammar in Context: Upper-Intermediate and Advanced, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2000. 3. Collins COBUILD English Dictionary for Advanced Learners, Glasgow: Collins, 2001. 4. T.T.N. Hung, Understanding English Grammar: A Course Book for Chinese Learners of English, Hong Kong: Hong Kong University Press, 2005. 5. C. Madden and T. Rohlck, Discussion and Interaction in the Academic Community, Ann Arbor, MI: University of Michigan Press, 1997. 6. M. McCarthy and F. O'Dell, English Vocabulary in Use: Advanced, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2002. 7. M. Nettle and D. Hopkins, Developing Grammar in Context: Intermediate, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003. 8. A. Oshima and A. Hogue, Writing Academic English, New York: Longman, 1991. 9. A. Oshima and A. Hogue, Introduction to Academic Writing, 2nd ed., New York: Longman, 1997. 10. M. Swan, Practical English Usage, 3rd ed., Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2005.
83
Subject Description Form
Subject Code ELC1004
Subject Title English for University Studies I
Credit Value 3
Level 1
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives This course aims to help students study effectively in an English-medium learning environment and to enhance their proficiency in English.
The course is designed to enable students to use English effectively in the contexts they will encounter in their university studies. The main emphasis is on improving students’ confidence and competence in grammar, vocabulary and pronunciation in these contexts.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes 1. deliver effective oral presentations; 2. summarise and paraphrase materials from written and spoken sources; and 3. plan, write and revise expository essays.
Subject Synopsis/ Keyword Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus This syllabus is indicative. The balance of the components, and the weighting accorded to each, will be based on the specific needs of the students.
1. Spoken communication Developing and practising specific oral skills required to prepare and deliver effective oral presentations; developing awareness of interpersonal communication strategies in different social and cultural contexts.
2. Written communication Analysing and practising common writing functions; improving abilities of writing topic sentences and strategies for paragraph development; understanding common patterns of organisation in writing; taking notes from written and spoken sources; introducing summarising skills; improving coherence and cohesion in writing; developing revision and proofreading skills.
3. Reading and listening Understanding the content and structure of information delivered orally and in print form; reading and listening for different purposes.
4. Language development Developing relevant grammar, vocabulary and pronunciation skills.
Teaching/ Learning The study method is primarily seminar-based. Seminar activities will include Methodology discussions, role-plays and individual and group activities. Use will be made of information technology where appropriate. Learning and teaching materials developed by the English Language Centre will be used throughout this course. Teachers will recommend additional reference materials as required.
84
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment Methods/Tasks % Weighting Intended Subject Learning Outcomes Continuous Assessment 100% Total 100%
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Seminar 42 Hours
Total student study effort: 42 Hours
Reading List and Reference List: References 1. J. Boyle and L. Boyle, Common Spoken English Errors in Hong Kong, Hong Kong: Longman, 1998. 2. B. Brannan, A Writer’s Workshop: Crafting Paragraphs, Building Essays Boston, Mass.: McGraw-Hill, 2003. 3. Collins COBUILD English Dictionary for Advanced Learners, Glasgow: Collins, 2001. 4. S. Cunningham and P. Moor, Cutting Edge (Advanced), Harlow, Essex: Pearson/Longman, 2005. 5. M. Hancock, English Pronunciation in Use, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003. 6. T.T.N. Hung, Understanding English Grammar: A Course Book for Chinese Learners of English, Hong Kong: Hong Kong University Press, 2005. 7. A. Jay and R. Jay, Effective Presentation, London: Prentice-Hall, 2000. 8. M. McCarthy and F. O'Dell, English Vocabulary in Use: Upper- Intermediate, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2001. 9. S. Redman, English Vocabulary in Use: Pre-Intermediate and Intermediate, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003. 10. G. Yule, Oxford Practice Grammar (Advanced), Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2006.
85
Subject Description Form
Subject Code ELC1005
Subject Title English for University Studies II
Credit Value 3
Level 1
Pre-requisite ELC1004 English for University Studies I
Co-requisite/ Nil Exclusion
Objectives This course aims to further enhance the written and spoken English communication skills that students will need to function effectively in their university studies. The main emphasis is on improving students’ confidence and competence in writing essays and participating in discussions.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes 1. participate effectively in formal and informal discussions; 2. organise and compose descriptive writing; and 3. plan and write argumentative essays.
Subject Synopsis/ Keyword Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus This syllabus is indicative. The balance of the components, and the weighting accorded to each, will be based on the specific needs of the students.
1. Spoken communication Enhancing and practising specific oral and aural skills required to participate effectively in formal interactions involving such activities as discussions and debates, as well as in a variety of informal contexts.
2. Written communication Writing descriptive texts; understanding and using common organisational patterns of argumentative essays; improving coherence and cohesion in writing; reinforcing revision and proofreading skills; achieving appropriate tone and style in writing.
3. Reading and listening Understanding the content and structure of information delivered orally and in print; reading and listening for different purposes.
4. Language development Developing relevant grammar, vocabulary and pronunciation skills.
Teaching/ Learning The study method is primarily seminar-based. Seminar activities will include Methodology discussions, role-plays and individual and group activities. Use will be made of information technology where appropriate. Learning and teaching materials developed by the English Language Centre will be used throughout this course. Teachers will recommend additional reference materials as required.
86
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment Methods/Tasks % Weighting Intended Subject Learning Outcomes Continuous Assessment 100% Total 100%
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Seminar 42 Hours
Total student study effort: 42 Hours
Reading List and Reference List: References 1. R. Barrass, Students Must Write: A Guide to Better Writing in Coursework and Examinations, 3rd ed., London: Routledge, 2005. 2. R. Carter, R. Hughes and M. McCarthy, Exploring Grammar in Context: Upper-Intermediate and Advanced, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2000. 3. Collins COBUILD English Dictionary for Advanced Learners, Glasgow: Collins, 2001. 4. C.G. Madden and T.N. Rohlck, Discussion and Interaction in the Academic Community, Ann Arbor, MI: University of Michigan Press, 1997. 5. M. McCarthy and F. O'Dell, English Vocabulary in Use: Advanced, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2002. 6. A. Oshima and A. Hogue, Writing Academic English, New York: Longman, 1991. 7. A. Oshima and A. Hogue, Introduction to Academic Writing, 2nd ed., White Plains, NY: Pearson/ Longman, 1997. 8. J.T. Wood, G.M. Philips and D.J. Pederson, Group Discussion: A Practical Guide to Participation and Leadership, 4th ed., Long Grove, Ill: Waveland Press, 2007.
87
Subject Description Form
Subject Code ENG1001
Subject Title Foundation Year Seminar I
Credit Value 1
Level 1
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives The subject is to enable students to have a foretaste of the discipline-specific or related study and to provide opportunities for more interaction with the Faculty members, through which students would also be helped to cultivate a sense of belonging to their parent faculty and departments and to build up a correct learning attitude in the University.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes 1. have a better understanding of their discipline, parent Faculty and Departments; 2. develop a sense of belonging to their parent Faculty and Departments; and 3. familiarize with the issues in effective learning.
Subject Synopsis/ Typical Topics of the Seminars Indicative Syllabus 1. Enhancing study habits as independent learners 2. Introduction and development of computing science and its related disciplines 3. Introduction and development of electronic and information engineering and its related disciplines 4. Introduction and development of electrical engineering and its related disciplines 5. Introduction and development of industrial and systems engineering and its related disciplines 6. Introduction and development of mechanical engineering and its related disciplines
Three of the five topics (2) – (6) will be covered in this subject.
Teaching/ Learning This subject consists of four seminars and three laboratory visits delivered by Methodology three Engineering Departments of the Faculty and SAO. Each of the three Departments will offer one seminar and one laboratory visit, and SAO will be responsible for one seminar.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment Methods/Tasks % Weighting Intended Subject 1. Continuous Assessment 100% Learning Outcomes Total 100%
The subject is assessed on a pass/fail basis, and method of assessment involves a Personal Log Book and a Reflective Essay.
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Seminar 8 Hours
88
• Visit 6 Hours
Total student study effort: 14 Hours
Reading List and Nil References
89
Subject Description Form
Subject Code ENG1002
Subject Title Foundation Year Seminar II
Credit Value 1
Level 1
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives The subject is to enable students to have a foretaste of the discipline-specific or related study and to provide opportunities for more interaction with the Faculty members, through which students would also be helped to cultivate a sense of belonging to their parent faculty and departments and to build up a correct learning attitude in the University.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes 1. have a better understanding of their discipline, parent Faculty and Departments; 2. develop a sense of belonging to their parent Faculty and Departments; and 3. familiarize with the issues in effective learning.
Subject Synopsis/ Typical Topics of the Seminars Indicative Syllabus 1. Building effective teams in learning 2. Introduction and development of computing science and its related disciplines 3. Introduction and development of electronic and information engineering and its related disciplines 4. Introduction and development of electrical engineering and its related disciplines 5. Introduction and development of industrial and systems engineering and its related disciplines 6. Introduction and development of mechanical engineering and its related disciplines
Two of the five topics (2) – (6) will be covered in this subject.
Teaching/ Learning This subject consists of three seminars, two laboratory visits, one visit to the Methodology Industrial Centre and one program specific activity. SAO will conduct one seminar, and two Engineering Departments of the Faculty will be responsible for two seminars and two laboratory visits. In addition to a visit to the Industrial Centre, a program specific activity will be arranged to let the students have further understanding of their own department. Typical activity includes a gathering to provide students opportunities to meet senior students of their own programmes.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment Methods/Tasks % Weighting Intended Subject Learning Outcomes 1. Continuous Assessment 100%
Total 100%
The subject is assessed on a pass/fail basis, and method of assessment
90
involves a Personal Log Book and a Reflective Essay.
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Seminar 6 Hours
• Visit 6 Hours
• Program specific activity 2 Hours
Total student study effort: 14 Hours
Reading List and Nil References
91
Subject Description Form
Subject Code ITC1001
Subject Title Design and Applied Technology
Credit Value 3
Level 1
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives This subject is designed for all students as an introductory subject in design and applied technology. It aims to provide students with an understanding of the fundamental knowledge and skills in design and technology, and to cultivate in them a sense of innovation and entrepreneurship necessary to face a society of rapid economic and technological changes.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes 1. become independent thinkers and innovative problem-solvers; 2. acquire a good understanding of the practical skills and knowledge in technology and design; 3. identify needs, wants and opportunities for improving the quality of living; 4. develop design and technological responses as well as a sense of entrepreneurship; and 5. become discriminating, informed and responsible users of products, and develop their awareness of the interplay between technology and innovation.
Subject Synopsis/ Keyword Syllabus (Indicative): Indicative Syllabus 1. Design and Innovation • Design in Practice - design fundamentals; design process; creativity in design; project management and teamwork; roles and positions of designers and engineers; • Design and Communication - project presentation and report; visual representation; physical, graphical, and mathematical, and computer modeling; • Design Considerations – design brief and specifications; solving design problems; human and environmental factors; product standards; design evaluation. 2. Technological Principles • Nature of Technology - innovation and technology; energy and energy resources; materials and standard components; • Production Processes - health and industrial safety; tools, equipment and machinery; manufacturing systems; • Systems and Control - input-process-output; logic gates; mechanical systems; physical structure; basic electronics. 3. Value and Impact • Values in Technology and Design - the changing roles of the designers and engineers in society; Intellectual property; product evaluation; environmental responsibility; appropriate technology; • Historical and Cultural Influences - evolution of craft and design; design and culture; new technology; • Entrepreneurship and Enterprise – competitive edge of Hong Kong; design to meet market aspirations; design strategies
92
Teaching/ Learning The subject comprises of lectures and tutorials. Lectures and tutorials are Methodology used to impart knowledge of design and technology. Exercises will largely be problem based where students will be given a scenario as a background on which to focus the various topics of the subject. Topics for discussion will direct students’ attention to a variety of reference materials. Critical analysis of existing examples of good and poor designs of applied technology in the today’s living will be included. This will be followed by group discussions and practical work, in which the students will suggest solutions to the problems and have their opinions shared, with staff providing guideline and opinions. Other activities will involve brainstorming, group discussions, debates, presentation and a certain degree of practical work. The assignments and guided reading are to complement the content being taught.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment Methods/Tasks % Weighting Intended Subject Learning Outcomes 1. Continuous Assessment 100% Total 100%
The continuous assessment comprises of assignments and student presentations. The assignments are used to assist the students to reflect and review on their progress and as well as to assess the knowledge acquired by the students and their ability to apply and extend such knowledge.
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 14 Hours
• Studio work and Workshop 28 Hours
Total student study effort: 42 Hours
Reading List and Reference List: References 1. Winning by Design: Technology, Product Design, and International Competitiveness. Oxford; Cambridge, Mass.: Blackwell Business, 1992. 2. Design Series [interactive media]. Dracut, Mass.: A. Routsis Associates, Inc. c1999. 3. R. Klanten, 3deluxe: projects, interior and graphic design. Berlin: Gestalten, 2002. 4. M. Frasciato, Design and Technology Matters: Interactions. Cheltenhan [England]: Stanley Thornes, 1992. 5. J. Garratt, Design and Technology, 2nd ed., Cambridge; New York: Cambridge University Press, 1996. 6. D. Guise, Design and Technology in Architecture. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1991. 7. P. Sparke, A Century of Design: Design Pioneers of the 20th Century. London: Mitchell Beazley, 1998. 8. C. Fiell, Design of the 20th Century, Koln; New York: Taschen, 1999. 9. Garments of light [videorecording]: custom clothing from body scans. [S.l.]: Clarity Fit Technologies, Inc.; [New York, N.Y.: Distributed by Fairchild Publications], c1997. 10. R. Mudge, (producer) Techno [videorecording]. London: BBC, c1991. [S.l.]: Pearson Television International; Hong Kong: Mediamatters Co. Ltd. [distributor], 1985. 11. Craft, design and technology, Unit 4 [videorecording] / Thames Television Ltd. 12. B. Lawson, How Designers Think: The Design Process Demystified. Oxford; Boston: Architectural Press, 1997.
93
Subject Description Form
Subject Code AMA227
Subject Title Mathematics I
Credit Value 3
Level 2
Pre-requisite / Co- Nil requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives The lectures aim to provide students with an integrated knowledge required for the understanding and application of mathematical concepts and techniques. To develop students’ ability for logical thinking and effective communication, tutorial sessions will be held.
Subject Learning Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Outcomes 1. apply mathematical reasoning to analyse essential features of different engineering problems; 2. apply appropriate mathematical techniques to model and solve problems in engineering; 3. develop and extrapolate mathematical concepts in synthesizing and solving new problems;
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcome 5. Outcomes Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcomes 9 and 10.
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Algebra of complex number Complex numbers; Geometric representation; n-th roots of complex numbers.
2. Linear algebra Matrices and determinants; Vector space; Elementary algebra of matrices; Eigenvalues and eigenvectors; Normalization and orthogonality.
3. Calculus of One Variable Elementary functions; Fundamental Theorem of Calculus; Techniques of integration.
4. Fourier Series and Fourier Transform Fourier series expansion of a periodic function; Half-range expansions; Basic properties of Fourier transform; Simple applications.
Teaching/Learning A two hour mass lecture will be conducted each week to initiate students into Methodology the ideas, concepts and techniques of the topics in the syllabus, which is then reinforced by a one hour tutorial designed to consolidate and develop students’ knowledge through discussion and practical problem solving.
94
Assessment Methods in Specific assessment % Intended subject Alignment with methods weighting learning outcomes to be Intended Learning assessed (Please tick as Outcomes appropriate)
1 2 3
1. Continuous Assessment 40%
2. Examination 60%
Total 100%
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Continuous Assessment comprises of assignments, in class quizzes, online quizzes and a mid-term test. A 3-hour examination is held at the end of the semester.
Questions used in assignments, quizzes, tests and examinations are set to test students’ ability with regard to any one of the intended learning outcomes.
To pass this subject, students are required to obtain grade D or above in both the continuous assessment and the examination components.
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected . Lecture 28 Hours
. Tutorial 14 Hours
. Quizzes Mid-term Test and Examination 8 Hours
Other student study effort:
. Assignments and Self-study 90 Hours
Total student study effort: 140 Hours
Reading List and Textbook: References 1. K.F. Hung, Wilson C.K. Kwan and Glory T.Y. Pong, Foundation Mathematics & Statistics, McGraw-Hill, 2011.
Reference Books:
1. H. Anton, Elementary Linear Algebra, 9th ed., John Wiley & Sons, 2004. 2. G.B. Thomas, M.D. Weir and J. Hass, Thomas’ Calculus, 12th ed., Addison- Wesley, 2009. 3. E. Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9th ed., Wiley, 2006.
95 Subject Description Form
Subject Code AMA228
Subject Title Mathematic II
Credit Value 3
Level 2
Pre-requisite / Co- Nil requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives The lectures aim to provide students with an integrated knowledge required for the understanding and application of mathematical concepts and techniques. To develop students’ ability for logical thinking and effective communication, tutorial and presentation sessions will be held.
Subject Learning Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Outcomes 1. apply mathematical reasoning to analyse essential features of different problems in engineering; 2. develop and extrapolate statistical concepts in synthesizing and solving new problem; 3. search for useful information and use statistical packages in solving statistical problems; 4. think critically about the uses and limitations of various statistical methods for solving problems in commerce and industry.
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcomes 5 and 6. Outcomes Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcomes 9 and 10.
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Ordinary differential equations First and second order linear ordinary differential equations; Laplace transform; Convolution theorem.
2. Descriptive Statistics Categorical and Numerical data; Frequency distributions; Mean, mode and median; Range and quartile; Standard Deviation.
3. Probability Rules of sums and products; Combinatorial probability; Independence and mutual exclusion; Bayes’ theorem.
4. Random Variables Discrete and continuous random variables; Binomial, Poisson, Exponential and Normal distributions; Law of large numbers; The Central Limit Theorem.
5. Markov process Recursions and Markov chains; Applications to queuing theory.
Teaching/Learning A two hour mass lecture will be conducted each week to initiate students into Methodology the ideas, concepts and techniques of the topics in the syllabus, which is then reinforced by a one hour tutorial designed to consolidate and develop
96 students’ knowledge through discussion and practical problem solving.
Assessment Methods in Alignment with Specific assessment % Intended subject Intended Learning methods weighting learning outcomes to Outcomes be assessed (Please tick as appropriate)
1 2 3 4
1. Continuous Assessment 40%
2. Examination 60%
Total 100%
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Continuous Assessment comprises of assignments, in class quizzes, online quizzes and a mid-term test. A 3-hour examination is held at the end of the semester.
Questions used in assignments, quizzes, tests and examinations are used to assess the student's level of understanding of the basic concepts and their ability to use mathematical and statistical techniques in solving problems in science and engineering.
To pass this subject, students are required to obtain grade D or above in both the continuous assessment and the examination components.
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected . Lecture 28 Hours
. Tutorial 14 Hours
. Mid-term Test and Examination 5 Hours
Other student study effort:
. Assignments and Self-study 73 Hours
Total student study effort: 120 Hours
Reading List and Textbooks: References 1. C.H. Edwards and D.E. Penny, Elementary Differential Equations, 6th ed., Prentice-Hall, 2008.
Reference Books:
1. M.R. Middleton, Data Analysis Using Microsoft Excel: Updated for Office XP, 3rd ed., Duxbury Press, 2003. 2. G.B. Thomas, M.D. Weir and J.R. Hass, Thomas’ Calculus, 12th ed., Addison-Wesley, 2009. 3. R.E. Walpole, R.H. Myers, S.L. Myers and K.Y. Ye, Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Scientists, 8th ed., Prentice-Hall, 2006.
97 Subject Description Form
Subject Code CBS2050
Subject Title Elementary Cantonese 基礎粵語
Credit Value 3
Level 2
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives 本課程旨在幫助國內學生在短期內學會日常生活所需使用的香港廣州話，並且 通過粵語的學習，幫助他們了解香港文化，認識香港社會。
Intended Subject 1. 幫助學員掌握香港粵語的語音、詞匯和語法的基本特點； Learning Outcomes 2. 幫助學員以粵語進行日常交際； 3. 通過學習粵語使學員了解香港社會文化並認識香港方言字。
Subject Synopsis/ Keyword Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 第一單元 簡介香港粵語的特點 粵語的拼音方案、粵語的語音
第二單元 介紹 重點學習：常見姓氏 “先”字的句式
第三單元 問侯 重點學習：香港人常用的問侯方式 比較格式
第四單元 打電話 重點學習：香港人電話交談的方式雙賓語句式
第五單元 約會 重點學習：簡單式語氣助詞
第六單元 問路 重點學習：方位表達法
第七單元 購物 重點學習：算錢的方式
第八單元 交通 重點學習：粵語“定”的動補結構式
第九單元 天氣 重點學習：天氣的表達
第十單元 飲食 重點學習：“之嘛”等複合式語氣助詞
第十一單元 香港 重點學習：將字句
第十二單元 買餸 重點學習：單音節形容詞的重疊式
98
第十三單元 睇醫生 重點學習：意願的表達方式
第十四單元 工作──搵工跳槽 重點學習：表達同意的方式
第十五單元 報紙 重點學習：表達可能的方式
第十六單元 旅遊──海洋公園 重點學習：囑咐的表達方式
第十七單元 電視文化 重點學習：責備的表達方式
第十八單元 香港廟宇──黃大仙 重點學習：安慰的表達方式
Teaching/ Learning 本課程採取情境教學法，共有十八個單元，讓學生在模擬的情境中對話，自然 Methodology 地學習語言。本課程也著重講解在每個情境中所使用的粵語各個成分，包括語 音、詞匯和語法，讓學生全面地和更有效地掌握香港粵語，以進行基本的語言 交際，包括課堂上的一般討論。
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment Methods/Tasks % Weighting Intended Subject Learning Outcomes 1. 課堂表現 20%
2. 測試
• 課堂練習測驗 30% • 個人短講 20%
• 期末小組口頭報告 30% Total 100%
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 42 Hours
Reading List and Essential Reading: References 1. 鄭定歐等編,《粵語香港話教程》, 三聯書店出版, 2003 年 10 月.
Reference List:
1. 高華年,《廣州方言研究》, 商務印書館, 1984 年 1 月. 2. 李新魁等, 《廣州方言研究》, 廣東人民出版社, 1995 年 6 月. 3. 歐陽覺亞, 《普通話廣州話的比較與學習》, 中國社會科學出版社, 1996 年 9 月. 4. 饒秉才等, 《廣州話方言詞典》, 商務印書館, 1996 年 11 月. 5. 《廣州音字典》,（普通話對照）, 三聯書店（香港）有限公司, 1996 年 4 月. 6. 曾子凡, 《廣州話、普通話口語詞對譯手冊》, 三聯書局, 1994 年 5 月. 7. 張洪年, 《香港粵語語法的研究》, 香港中文大學, 1972 年 10 月.
99
Subject Description Form
Subject Code CBS2080
Subject Title Fundamentals of Chinese Communication
Credit Value 3
Level 2
Pre-requisite/ Students whose HKALE result for Chinese Language and Culture is at grade D Co-requisite/ or below are advised to complete / concurrently take non-credit bearing Exclusion Chinese Language Enhancement subject(s) as recommended.
Objectives This subject aims to enhance and polish the communication skills of the students in both written Chinese and Putonghua for basic usage in the work- place.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes (a) develop effective communication skills in both written Chinese and Putonghua required for basic usage in the work-place; (b) master the format, organization, language and style of expression of various genres of Chinese practical writing such as official correspondences, publicity materials, reports and proposals; (c) give formal presentation in Putonghua; (d) engage with formal discussion in Putonghua.
Students will be required to read and write intensively for enhancing their proficiency level in written Chinese. They would be required to organize their own ideas, concepts in sensible and logical manner and present them in both written and spoken format for effective transmission of message in given contexts with specific purposes. Such learning activities would engage them in reasoning and analytical processes. The mastering of effective communication skills in both written Chinese and Putonghua will also facilitate their life-long learning in various disciplines.
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness Programme • Programme Outcomes 9 and 12: The subject will enhance students’ Outcomes communication abilities of Chinese Language in forms of writing and speaking for different social settings. As the communicative tasks involved require not only good competence in the Chinese Language but also suitable ways of handling social relations and professional convention in communicating with each other, the subject allows students to acquire adequate strategies and be aware of the attitudes they should have for achieving successful communication. These will encourage them to be collaborative with other members within a team, and in the workplace.
Subject Synopsis/ 1. Written Chinese for practical purposes Indicative Syllabus • uses of words and sentences; • coherence in Chinese writing • format, organization, language and style of expression of official correspondences, publicity materials, reports and proposals; • context dependent stylistic variation 2. Formal Presentation in Putonghua • the articulation in Putonghua • the flow of speaking • choice of words, manner and gesture 3. Formal Discussion in Putonghua
100
• identification of main idea and key messages • evaluation of relevancy of information in a message • skills of seeking clarity/agree/disagreeing/answering to a question • skills of summarizing
Teaching/ Learning The subject will be conducted in Putonghua, in highly interactive seminars. The Methodology subject will motivate the students’ active participation by assigning group presentation /discussion in class. In a forum-like format, students are guided to : (1) present to the class, their understanding of each genre designed for the syllabus for discussions and improvement; (2) modify passages in a given genre/style into other genres/styles for addressing different audiences and purposes; (3) give a power-point presentation in Putonghua in front of the whole class, then receive on spot feedback for discussion and improvement; then (4) prepare a written report/proposal on the same topic; and (5) engage in formal discussion in Putonghua on topics related to current issues and/or business operation; then (6) produce a written document on the same topic using a chosen genre.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment % Intended Subject Learning Intended Subject Methods/Tasks Weighting Outcomes to be Assessed Learning Outcomes (Please tick as appropriate) a b c d
• Written Assignment 30%
• Oral Presentation 30% • Final Examination 40% Total 100%
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Seminar 42 Hours
Other student study effort:
• Outside class practice 3 x 14 = 42 Hours
• Self-study 3 x 14 = 42 Hours
Total student study effort: 126 Hours
Reading List and Reading List: References 1. 路德慶主編(1982) 《寫作教程》，華東師範大學出版社。 2. 邵守義（1991）《演講全書》，吉林人民出版社。 3. 陳建民（1994）《說話的藝術》，語文出版社。 4. 李軍華（1996）《口才學》，華中理工大學出版社。 5. 陳瑞端著（2000）《生活錯別字》，中華書局。 6. 邢福義、汪國勝主編（2003）《現代漢語》，華中師範大學出版社。 7. 于成鯤主編（2003）《現代應用文》，復旦大學出版社。 8. 鍾文佳（2004）《漢語口才學》，西南師範大學出版社。 9. 李白堅、丁迪蒙（2004）《大學體型寫作訓練規程》，上海大學出版社。 10. 于成鯤、陳瑞端、秦扶一、金振邦主編（2011）《當代應用文寫作規範叢 書》，復旦大學出版社。
101
Subject Description Form
Subject Code EIE210
Subject Title Electronics Design
Credit Value 3
Level 2
Pre-requisite Nil
Co-requisite/ Nil Exclusion
Objectives To provide a broad treatment of the fundamentals of electronics design, with emphasis of multimedia technologies.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. Understand the fundamentals of electronics systems and the associated technologies. 2. Solve problems and design simple electronics systems related to multimedia technologies. 3. Apply theory to practice by doing laboratory experiments on important electronics techniques. 4. Appreciate the importance of creativity and critical thinking in the creation of ubiquitous electronics systems in a modern society, and to realize that there is no unique solution for any particular situation and that engineers have to find “optimum” solutions, or make optimum designs.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness 5. Present ideas and findings effectively. 6. Think critically. 7. Learn independently. 8. Work in a team and collaborate effectively with others.
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcome 1: This subject contributes to the programme Outcomes outcome through teaching of some of the fundamentals of electronics systems and the associated technologies and providing opportunities for students to practice the application of the knowledge. • Programme Outcome 3: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing opportunities for students to solve practical problems pertaining to the field of multimedia technologies.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcome 9: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing the students with an opportunity to orally present their works in class. • Programme Outcome 10: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing opportunities for students to conduct literature survey and select materials in a critical manner.
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction to electronics systems Overview of the fundamental components in electronics systems: analog and digital subsystems and their components. Basic relation between human sensory organs and audiovisual signals. Need for amplification and filtering. Need for logic manipulation and actuation. 102
2. Analog subsystems DC power supplies and regulators. Characteristics and applications of practical operational amplifiers. The basic concept of negative feedback and their effects on circuits. Feedback oscillators. Characteristics and classification of power amplifiers. Basic filter principle and approximations. Frequency response and realization of analog filters: passive and active filters. Brief introduction to discrete-time implementation of analog filters: SC filters.
3. Digital subsystems Operation and design of CMOS logic gates. Typical operation and design of flip-flops, registers, counters. Multi-vibrators and timers. Estimation of the speed of operation. Memory circuits: structure and operation of ROM, RAM.
Laboratory Experiments:
1. CMOS Astable Multi-vibrators 2. Power amplifiers 3. Voltage regulators
Case Study: A selected topic in electronics
Teaching/ Learning Teaching and Intended Remarks Methodology Learning Method Subject Learning
Outcome Lectures 1, 2 fundamental principles and key concepts of the subject are delivered to students Tutorials 1, 2, 4 students will be able to clarify concepts and to have a deeper understanding of the lecture material; problems and application examples are given and discussed Laboratory 1, 2, 3, 4 students in groups of 2-3 will conduct sessions practical measurement and evaluate the performance of electronic circuits Case study 5, 6, 7, 8 Each student is required to perform a detailed study on a subject in electronics in a team and present the result independently
103
Alignment of Assessment and Specific % Intended Subject Learning Outcomes Intended Subject Assessment Weighting to be Assessed (Please tick as Learning Outcomes Methods/Tasks appropriate) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. Continuous 40%
Assessment • Short quizzes
• Assignments • Tests
• Laboratory sessions, mini- project • Case study
2. Examination 60% Total 100%
The continuous assessment will consist of a number of assignments, and a series of quizzes.
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in
assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Specific Assessment Remark Methods/Tasks Short quizzes mainly objective tests (e.g., multiple-choice questions, true-false, and matching items) conducted to measure the students’ ability to remember facts and figures as well as their comprehension of subject materials Assignments, tests end-of chapter type problems used to evaluate and examination students’ ability in applying concepts and skills learnt in the classroom; students need to think critically and creatively in order to come with an alternate solution for an existing problem Laboratory sessions, each group of students are required to produce a mini-project written report; accuracy and the presentation of the report will be assessed; oral examination based on the laboratory exercises will be conducted for each group member to evaluate his technical knowledge and communication skills Case study each student will produce a written report ; students will be assessed based on the content/organization of the report
Student Study Class contact (time-tabled): Effort Expected • Lecture 24 Hours
• Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes 18 hours
Other student study effort:
104 • Lecture: preview/review of notes; 36 Hours homework/assignment; preparation for test/quizzes/examination • Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes: preview of 27 Hours materials, revision and/or reports writing Total student study effort: 105 Hours
Reading List and Textbooks: References 1. T. Floyd, Fundamentals of Analog Circuits, 2nd ed., Upper Saddle River, N.J: Prentice-Hall, 2002. 2. R. Schaumann and M.E. Van Valkenburg, Design of Analog Filters, Oxford University Press, 2001.
Reference Books:
1. P.R. Gray and R.G. Meyer, Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits, 4th ed., New York, N.Y: Wiley, 2001. 2. J.M. Rabaey, Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design Perspective, 2nd ed., Upper Saddle River, N.J: Pearson Education International, 2003.
105 Subject Description Form
Subject Code EIE214
Subject Title Introduction to Logic Design
Credit Value 3
Level 2
Pre-requisite/ Co- Nil requisite
Exclusion Logic Design (EIE211)
Objectives To provide students with a broad view in hardware aspects of digital logic systems and enable them to have better understanding and knowledge that can be applied in later digital design related courses.
Emphasis will be placed on the following topics: 1. Common binary logic components 2. Sequential circuits 3. Structure and organization of digital logic systems 4. Usage and applications of programmable logic devices
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. Apply the fundamental knowledge of digital systems and associated technologies 2. Design and conduct experiments for simple logic components 3. Design a simple digital system to meet realistic specification 4. Aware different design issues of digital systems
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness 5. Present their ideas and observation effectively 6. Understand the creative process 7. Work in a team and collaborate effectively with others
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcome 1: This subject contributes to the programme Outcomes outcome through teaching of the fundamentals of digital systems and providing the students with an opportunity to practice the application of knowledge. • Programme Outcome 2: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through designing of digital system and providing the students with an opportunity to conduct experiments. • Programme Outcome 6: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing opportunity for students to aware different design issues of digital systems.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcome 9: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through report writings. • Programme Outcome 10: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing students with an opportunity to think creatively in conducting experiments. • Programme Outcome 12: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing students with an opportunity to work in a team.
106 Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Number Systems, Operations, and Logic Circuits 1.1 Binary, octal and hexadecimal numbers; base conversions 1.2 1’s complement, 2’s complement and binary arithmetic 1.3 Binary-coded-decimal (BCD) representation 1.4 Fundamentals of Boolean algebra (DeMorgan’s theorem) 1.5 Electronic logic gates (NOT, AND, OR, NAND, NOR, XOR and XNOR) 1.6 Circuit simplification (Karnaugh Maps)
2. Combinational Circuits 2.1 Decoders and encoders 2.2 Multiplexers and de-multiplexers 2.3 Binary adders, binary adder-subtractors 2.4 HDL representations of combinational circuits
3. Sequential Circuits 3.1 Latches 3.2 Master-slave flip-flops, edge-triggered flip-flops (SR, D, JK, T) 3.3 Flip-flop timing 3.4 HDL representations of sequential circuits
4. Counters 4.1 Asynchronous counters and synchronous counters 4.2 Up-down counters 4.3 Counters with arbitrary sequence 4.4 Design procedure of counters 4.5 Circuit representations of counters 4.6 HDL representations of counters
5. Digital Sequential Systems 5.1 Asynchronous reset and synchronous reset 5.2 Design procedure of sequential systems (state table and state diagram) 5.3 Finite state machine (Mealy model and Moore model) 5.4 Timing characteristics of sequential systems 5.5 Circuit representations of sequential systems 5.6 Case Study: Sequential number recognizer and traffic light
6. Memory and Registers 6.1 RAM: Write and read operations, timing waveforms, RAM integrated circuits, three-state buffers, DRAM ICs 6.2 Memory organization 6.3 Register design and register transfer structure
7. Micro-operations in Microprocessors 7.1 Serial arithmetic operations 7.2 Shift operations 7.3 Shift and add multiplier
Laboratory Experiment:
1. Basic logic gates and their applications 2. Programmable logic devices with HDL
107
Teaching/ Learning Teaching Intended Remarks Methodology and Subject Learning Learning
Method Outcome Lectures 1, 3, 4, 6 Fundamental principles and key concepts of the subject are delivered to students. Tutorials 1, 3, 4, 5, Supplementary to lectures are conducted with 6 smaller class size. The students will be able to clarify concepts and to have a better understanding of the lecture material. Some exercises and application examples are given for discussion. Laboratory 1, 2, 3, 4, Students will make use of the software and sessions 5, 6, 7 hardware tools to develop simple digital systems and perform simulations.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment % Intended Subject Learning Intended Subject Methods/Tasks Weighting Outcomes to be Assessed Learning Outcomes (Please tick as appropriate) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1. Continuous Assessment (total 50%) • Assignments 10%
• Tests 25% • Laboratory sessions, 15% mini-project 2. Examination 50%
Total 100%
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Specific Remark
Assessment Methods/Tasks
Assignments, End-of-chapter type problems used to evaluate students’ Tests and ability in applying concepts and skills learnt in the examination classroom; Students need to think critically and creatively in order to come with an alternate solution for an existing problem. Laboratory Each student is required to give demonstrations and sessions, mini- produce a written report; project Accuracy and the presentation of the report will be
assessed;
Student Study Class contact (time-tabled): Effort Expected • Lecture 24 Hours
• Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes 18 hours
Other student study effort:
108 • Lecture: preview/review of notes; 36 Hours homework/assignment; preparation for tests/examination • Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes: preview of 27 Hours materials, revision and/or reports writing Total student study effort: 105 Hours
Reading List and Textbooks: References 1. M.M. Mano and C.R. Kime, Logic and Computer Design Fundamentals, 4th ed., Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 2008.
Reference Books:
1. T.L. Flody, Digital Fundamentals with VHDL, Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 2003. 2. V.P. Nelson, H.T. Nagle, B.D. Carroll and J.D. Irwin, Digital Logic Circuit Analysis & Design, Prentice-Hall, 1997.
109 Subject Description Form
Subject Code EIE226
Subject Title Introduction to Databases
Credit Value 3
Level 2
Pre-requisite / Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives To introduce:
1. concepts of data models and principles of data normalization 2. database development life cycle 3. practical skills of relational database design
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. Develop data models for a database application using ER diagrams 2. Use the concepts of data normalization to develop well-designed database applications.
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcome 4: This subject contributes to the programme Outcomes outcome by providing students with laboratory exercises to write software programs to develop database applications. • Programme Outcome 8: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through the teaching of the theories and concepts of databases.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcome 11: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through providing the opportunity for students to learn independently.
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Database context Introduction to Database; File and database processing systems; Definition of database; DBMS examples.
2. Database design 2.1 Data Modelling: Entity relationship model; Elements of the E.R. model. 2.2 Relational Model: Keys Definition; Integrity Constraints, Transforming ER diagrams into relations; Normalization. 2.3 Mapping Logical Database Designs into Physical Storage Mechanisms: Indexing; File Organisations.
3. Database Processing Foundations of relational implementation; Defining relational data; Relational data manipulation; Relational algebra; Structured query language; Restricting and sorting data; Displaying data from multiple tables.
4. Data Management 4.1 Data administration: data dictionaries; data quality; database security; authentication and authorisation; concurrent access 4.2 Distributed databases: client-server architecture, replication and 110 partitioning; Internet and Intranet databases
Laboratory Experiments
Experiment/Mini Project:
Possible mini-projects include - Design and develop a database system for various practical applications.
Teaching/Learning Lectures: Fundamental principles and key concepts of the subject are Methodology delivered to students.
Tutorials: Students will be able to clarify concepts and to have a deeper understanding of the lecture material; problems and application examples are given and discussed.
Laboratory Sessions: Students will do some programming exercises to enhance their understanding on database design and development.
Mini-project: Students in groups of 2-3 will design and develop a database systems for some practical applications.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment % Weighting Intended Subject Intended Subject Methods/Tasks Learning Outcomes to Learning Outcomes be Assessed (Please tick as appropriate) 1 2 1. Continuous Assessment
(Total: 60%) • Short quizzes 5% • Tests 20% • Laboratory 5% • Mini-project 30% 2. Examination 40% Total 100%
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Short quizzes: These can measure the students’ understanding of the theories and concepts as well as their comprehension of subject materials.
Tests & Examination: End-of-chapter-type problems are used to evaluate the students’ ability in applying concepts and skills learnt in the classroom; students need to think critically and to learn independently in order to come up with an appropriate design.
Laboratory: Each student is required to produce a report; the accuracy and presentation of the report will be assessed.
Miniproject: Each group of students are requierd to produce a written report; oral examination will be conducted for each group member to evaluate their technical knowledge and communication skills.
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 24 Hours
• Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes 18 hours
111 Other student study effort:
• Lecture: preview/review of notes; 36 Hours homework/assignment; preparation for test/quizzes/examination • Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes: preview of 27 Hours materials, revision and/or reports writing Total student study effort: 105 Hours
Reading List and Textbooks: References 1. Michael V. Mannino, Database Design, Application Development and Administration, 3rd ed., McGraw-Hill, 2007.
112 Subject Description Form
Subject Code ELC2501
Subject Title University English I
Credit Value 2
Level 2
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives This subject aims to help students to study effectively in the University’s English medium learning environment and, more specifically, to improve and develop their English language proficiency within a framework of academic contexts. In striving to achieve the two interrelated objectives, attention will be given to developing the core competencies the University has identified as vital to the development of effective life-long learning strategies and skills.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to communicate Learning Outcomes effectively in an academic context through:
1. writing well-organised academic texts, such as expository essays 2. using appropriate referencing skills in academic writing and speaking 3. delivering effective oral presentations
To achieve the above outcomes, students are expected to use language and text structure appropriate to the context and to critically select relevant information to develop a theme in a text.
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness Programme • Programme Outcome 9: Communicate effectively, and present ideas and Outcomes findings clearly in oral and written forms. • Programme Outcome 10: Think critically and creatively. • Programme Outcome 11: Demonstrate self-learning and life-long learning capability. • Programme Outcome 12: Collaborate effectively with other members in a team, and demonstrate leadership capability.
Subject Synopsis/ This syllabus is indicative. The balance of the components, and the Indicative Syllabus corresponding weighting accorded to each, will be based on the specific needs of the students.
1. Written academic communication Identifying and employing functions common in written academic discourse; note-taking from reading and listening inputs; understanding and applying principles of academic text structure; developing paraphrasing, summarising and referencing skills; improving editing and proofreading skills; achieving appropriate tone and style in academic writing.
2. Spoken academic communication Recognising the purposes of, and differences between, spoken and written communication in English in academic contexts; identifying and practising the verbal and non-verbal interaction strategies in oral presentations; explaining and presenting ideas that require the development and application of logical thinking.
3. Reading and listening in academic contexts Understanding the content and structure of information delivered orally and
113
in print; reading and listening for different purposes e.g. as input to tasks, and for developing specific reading or listening skills; using a dictionary to obtain lexical, phonological and orthographical information.
4. Language development Improving and extending relevant features of students' grammar, vocabulary and pronunciation.
Teaching/ Learning The subject is designed to introduce students to the communication skills, both Methodology oral and written, that they may need to function effectively in academic contexts.
The study method is primarily seminar-based. Activities include teacher input as well as individual and group work involving drafting and evaluating texts, mini-presentations and discussions. Students will be referred to information on the internet and the ELC’s Centre for Independent Language Learning.
Learning materials developed by the English Language Centre are used throughout this course. Additional reference materials will be recommended as required.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment % Weighting Intended Subject Learning Intended Subject Methods/ Tasks Outcomes to be Assessed Learning Outcomes (Please tick as appropriate) 1 2 3
Continuous Assessment
• Short academic text 60%
• Team oral presentation 40% Total 100%
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes: Students’ oral and writing skills are evaluated through assessment tasks related to the learning outcomes. Students are assessed on the accuracy and the appropriacy of the language used in fulfilling the assessment tasks, as well as the selection and organisation of ideas.
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Seminars 28 Hours
Other student study effort: • Classwork-related and project-related preparation 56 Hours and self-access work
Total student study effort: 84 Hours
Reading List and Coursebook: References 1. English Language Centre, University English I. Hong Kong: The Hong Kong Polytechnic University, 2009.
Recommended readings:
1. R. Carter, R. Hughes and M. McCarthy, Exploring Grammar in Context: Upper-intermediate and Advanced, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2000. 2. M. McCarthy and F. O'Dell, English Vocabulary in Use: Upper- intermediate, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2001.
114
3. A. Oshima and A. Hogue, Writing Academic English, 4th ed., White Plains, NY: Pearson/Longman, 2006. 4. S. Reinhart, Giving Academic Presentations, Ann Arbor, MI: University of Michigan Press, 2002. 5. R.F. Verderber, K.S. Verderber and D.D. Sellnow, The Challenge of Effective Speaking, 15th ed., Belmont, CA: Thomson/Wadsworth, 2011. 6. M. Waters and A. Waters, Study Tasks in English, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995.
115
Subject Description Form
Subject Code ELC2502
Subject Title University English II
Credit Value 2
Level 2
Pre-requisite ELC2501 University English I
Co-requisite/ Nil Exclusion
Objectives To further develop those English language skills required by students to study effectively in the University’s English medium learning environment.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to communicate Learning Outcomes effectively in an academic context through:
1. participating actively in academic discussions 2. writing academic argumentative essays.
To achieve the above outcomes, students are expected to use language and text structure appropriate to the context and to critically select relevant information to develop a thesis and arguments in a text.
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness Programme • Programme Outcome 9: Communicate effectively, and present ideas and Outcomes findings clearly in oral and written forms. • Programme Outcome 10: Think critically and creatively. • Programme Outcome 11: Demonstrate self-learning and life-long learning capability. • Programme Outcome 12: Collaborate effectively with other members in a team, and demonstrate leadership capability.
Subject Synopsis/ This syllabus is indicative. The balance of the components, and the Indicative Syllabus corresponding weighting, will be based on the specific needs of the students.
1. Written Academic Communication Understanding and applying principles of the text structure of persuasive and argumentative academic texts; further developing paraphrasing, summarising and referencing skills; improving editing and proofreading skills; achieving appropriate tone and style in academic writing.
2. Spoken Academic Communication Identifying and practising the verbal and non-verbal interaction strategies in academic discussions; explaining and presenting ideas that require the development and application of creative and critical thinking.
3. Reading and Listening in Academic Contexts Understanding the content and structure of ideas delivered orally and in print; distinguishing between ‘fact’ and ‘opinion’.
4. Language Development Further improving and extending relevant features of grammar, vocabulary and pronunciation.
116
Teaching/ Learning The subject is designed to introduce students to the communication skills, both Methodology oral and written, that they may need to function effectively in academic contexts.
The study method is primarily seminar-based. Activities include teacher input as well as individual and group work involving drafting and evaluating texts, mini-presentations and discussions. Students will be referred to information on the internet and the ELC’s Centre for Independent Language Learning.
Learning materials developed by the English Language Centre are used throughout this course. Additional reference materials will be recommended as required.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment % Weighting Intended Subject Intended Subject Methods/ Tasks Learning Outcomes to Learning Outcomes be Assessed (Please tick as appropriate) 1 2
Continuous Assessment • Seminar discussion 40%
• Discursive essay 60% Total 100%
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes: Students’ oral and writing skills are evaluated through assessment tasks related to the learning outcomes. Students are assessed on the accuracy and the appropriacy of the language used in fulfilling the assessment tasks, as well as the selection and organisation of ideas.
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Seminars 28 Hours
Other student study effort: • Classwork-related and project-related preparation 56 Hours and self-access work
Total student study effort: 84 Hours
Reading List and Coursebook: References 1. English Language Centre, University English II. Hong Kong: The Hong Kong Polytechnic University, 2009.
Recommended readings:
1. T.E. Damer, Attacking Faulty Reasoning: A Practical Guide to Fallacy-free Arguments, 6th ed., Belmont, CA: Thomson/Wadsworth, 2009. 2. K. Hyland, English for Academic Purposes: An Advanced Resource Book. London; New York: Routledge, 2006. 3. C.G. Madden and T. Rohlck, Discussion and Interaction in the Academic Community, Ann Arbor, MI: University of Michigan Press, 1997. 4. K.T. McWhorter, Study and Critical Thinking Skills in College, 6th ed., New York: Pearson/Longman, 2008. 5. A. Meyers, Gateways to Academic Writing: Effective Sentences, Paragraphs and Essays, White Plains, NY: Longman, 2005. 6. N.V. Wood, Writing Argumentative Essays, 2nd ed., Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 2001.
117
7. L.J. Zwier, Building Academic Vocabulary, Ann Arbor, MI: University of Michigan Press, 2002.
118
Subject Description Form
Subject Code ENG224
Subject Title Information Technology
Credit Value 3
Level 2
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives To provide the foundation knowledge in computers, computer networks and data processing that is essential to modern information system design.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. Understand the functions and features of computer hardware and software components. 2. Understand the architecture and functions of a computer operating system and be able to use the services it provided for managing computer resources. 3. Understand the basic structure of a database system and be able to set up and configure a simple database system. 4. Understand the principles of computer networks and be able to set up and configure a simple computer network.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness 5. Solving problems using systematic approaches.
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme outcome 1: identify the different aspects of Internet and Outcomes multimedia systems. • Programme outcome 3: identify, analyze and solve technical problems related to Internet and multimedia technologies.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme outcome 11: demonstrate self-learning and life-long learning capability.
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction to computers (10 hours) Introduction to applications of information technology in different engineering disciplines. Introduction to computer hardware components: CPU, RAM, ROM, I/O devices and internal buses. Software components: applications, utilities and operating systems. Case study: Linux – user Interfaces, file management and process management.
2. Computer Networks(18 hours) Introduction to computer networks: LAN and WAN, client-server and peer- to-peer architectures, network topology. OSI 7-layer model. TCP/IP protocol: UDP and TCP, port multiplexing, IP addressing and routing protocols. Internet applications. Networking devices: DSL modem, hub, bridge, switch, and router. Case studies: Ethernet – cabling, topology and access methods.
119
3. Introduction to data processing and information systems(14 hours) Database systems – architecture, relational database concept, structural query language (SQL), database management systems, Web and database linking, database application development. Introduction to Information systems. Workflow management. Case study: Database design, implementation and management.
Teaching/ Learning There will be a mix of lectures, tutorials and laboratory works to facilitate Methodology effective learning. Students will be given case studies to understand and practice the design and usage of database systems.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment % Intended Subject Learning Methods/ Task Outcomes to be Assessed Intended Subject Weighting Learning Outcomes (Please tick as appropriate) 1 2 3 4 5 1. Continuous 40% Assessment 2. Examination 60% Total 100%
The assessment methods include an end-of-subject examination (60%), three tests (15%), and two laboratory work (10%), tutorial sessions with four tests (10%), three assignments (5%). The examination cover intended subject learning outcomes 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5. The continuous assessments (three tests from the lecture portion, 4 tests from the tutorial portion and 3 Assignments) cover intended subject learning outcomes 1, 2, 3, 4. The lab works (with 1 test) cover intended subject learning outcomes 2, 3 and 5. The examination is a 2.5-hour, closed-book examination, and all of the tests are closed book. The laboratory sessions give the student a hands-on experience of an Unix OS (assessed by an end-of-lab test) and the construction of a data base (assessed by an end-of-lab report).
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 28 Hours
• Tutorial 9 Hours
• Laboratory 17 Hours
Other student study effort: • Assignment Preparation and Laboratory Report 36 Hours Writing • Self study 36 Hours
Total student study effort: 126 Hours
Reading List and Reference Books: References 1. M. Small, Information Technology and the Internet: The Kernel, McGraw Hill, 2007. 2. D.E. Comer, Computer Networks and Internets: with Internet Applications, 4th ed., Prentice-Hall, 2004. 3. W. Stalling, Data and Computer Communications, 8th ed., Prentice-Hall, 2007. 4. C.J. Date, An Introduction to Database Systems, 5th ed., Addison-Wesley,
120
2000. 5. Michael Mannino, Database Design, Application Development, & Administration, 3rd ed., McGraw-Hill, 2007.
121
Subject Description Form
Subject Code ENG236
Subject Title Computer Programming
Credit Value 3
Level 2
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives 1. To introduce the fundamental concepts of computer programming. 2. To equip students with sound skills in C/C++ programming language. 3. To equip students with techniques for developing structured computer programs. 4. To demonstrate the techniques for implementing engineering applications using computer programs.
Intended Learning Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills After taking this subject, students should be able to develop a good computer program using the C/C++ programming language. To be specific, students should be able to achieve the following:
1. Familiarize themselves with at least one C/C++ programming environment. 2. Be proficient in using the basic constructs of C/C++, to develop a computer program. 3. Be able to develop a structured and documented computer program. 4. Understand the fundamentals of object-oriented programming and be able to apply it in computer program development. 5. Be able to apply the computer programming techniques to solve practical engineering problems.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness 6. Solve problems by using systematic approaches in a team.
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcome 2 and 3: This subject contributes to the programme Outcomes outcome through the teaching computer programming and requiring students to finish a mini-project. • Programme Outcomes 4 and 7: This subject contributes to these programme outcomes through the teaching of the concepts and skills for using C/C++ programming language, and by providing students with the opportunity to apply the programming techniques to solve practical engineering problems.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcomes 9 and 12: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing the students with an opportunity to practice working in a team for the mini-project.
Subject Synopsis/ 1. Introduction to programming - Components of a computer; Programming Indicative Syllabus environment; Process of application development.
2. Bolts and Nuts of C/C++ - Preprocessor; Program code; Functions; Comments; Variables and constants; Expressions and statements; Operators.
122
3. Program Flow Control - Branching and looping; Function parameters passing; Return values; Local and global variables; Scope of variables.
4. Program Design and Debugging - Structured program design; Modular programming; Exceptions and debugging. Case study: Using the Visual C++ debugger.
5. Basic Object Oriented Programming - Objects and classes; Private versus public; Implementing class methods; Constructors and destructors.
6. Pointer and Array - The stack and the free store; Create and delete objects in the free store; Pointer arithmetic; Passing function arguments by pointer; Returning values by pointer; Array of objects; Array and pointer; Array of pointers; Pointer of array; Character array; Command-line processing.
7. Stream I/O - Input and output as streams; File I/O using streams.
8. Using C/C++ in Engineering Applications - Solving practical problems using C/C++; Developing graphical user interfaces for engineering applications.
Teaching/ Learning The subject is delivered through weekly lectures. Tutorials in terms of Methodology exercises related to the lecturing materials follow in the same week. Tutors will aid the lecturer in helping students finishing the exercises, and interactive Q&A will take place. The lectures and tutorials aim at achieving the learning outcomes 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5.
To assure the students’ understanding of fundamental concepts, short- quizzes and closed-book tests are arranged regularly. The learning outcomes 2, 3 and 4 can be evaluated at different check-points.
To enhance the students’ problem solving skill in a given programming environment, open-book programming tests are arranged regularly. The learning outcomes 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 can be evaluated at different check-points.
After all the subject materials have been delivered, students are asked to finish a mini-project in a team. The project involves a practical engineering problem of some stated specification. Apart from meeting the learning outcomes 1-5, the students have to practice solving problems using systematic approaches in a team. The achievement in meeting the learning outcome 6 should be reflected from the mini-project result.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment % Intended Subject Learning Methods/ Task Outcomes to be Assessed Intended Learning Weighting Outcomes (Please tick as appropriate) 1 2 3 4 5 6
Continuous Assessment • In-class exercises 10%
• Short-quizzes 10% • Closed-book tests 20%
• Programming tests 30% • Mini-project 30%
Total 100%
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
123 The short-quizzes and closed-book tests are for assessing the understanding of fundamental concepts. The in-class exercises and programming tests are conducted within the programming environment to help students familiarized with it. The problems to be solved are typically presented as practical engineering problems. Through conducting the mini-project that lasts for several weeks, students would be able to experience how to solve problems by using systematic approaches in a team.
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 23 Hours
• Tutorial/ Laboratory 22 Hours
• Test/Quiz 11 Hours
• Mini-project presentation 1 Hour
Other student study effort:
• Self-studying 45 Hours
• Homework 15 Hours
• Mini-project/Report 10 Hours
Total student study effort: 127 Hours
Reading List and Textbook: References 1. J. Liberty, S. Rao and B. Jones, Sams Teach Yourself C++ in One Hour a Day. Sams Publishing, 2009.
Reference Book:
1. P.J. Deitel and H.M. Deitel, C++ How To Program, 7th ed., Pearson, 2010. 2. I. Horton, Ivor Horton's Beginning Visual C++ 2010, Wiley Publishing, 2010.
124 Subject Description Form
Subject Code GEC225
Subject Title Exploration of the Cosmos 宇宙的探索
Credit Value 3
Level 2
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives This subject is a descriptive survey of modern astronomy. It introduces the student to the study of phenomena outside the confines of the earth.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes 1. have a basic understanding of the scientific method and be able to apply it; 2. understand the underlying scientific principles by which astronomical observations and research are carried out; 3. understand the structure and order of the solar system; and 4. understand the evolution of stars and how science can come to know this; and have been exposed to the some current work in such study areas as planetary geoscience, stellar evolution, galactic evolution, cosmology, and the search for extraterrestrial life.
Subject Synopsis/ Keyword Syllabus (Indicative): Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction • Syllabus • The Celestial Sphere • Motions of the Earth 2. The Scientific Method • Empiricism • Theory • Dialog 3. Some Basic Science Concepts • The Copernican Revolution (the origin of science as a way of thinking) • The Nature of Light and Matter • Telescopes 4. Stellar Evolution • The Sun • Measuring the Stars • The Interstellar Medium • Stellar Evolution • Neutron Stars and Black Holes 5. The Solar System • Overview of the Solar System • The Earth-Moon System • The Terrestrial Planets (i.e. “Earth-like”) • The Jovian Planets (i.e. “Jupiter-like”) • Solar System Debris (moons, rings, and Pluto) 6. Beyond the Solar System • Cosmology • Life in the Universe Measuring the Stars
125
Teaching/ Learning The analytic procedure of the scientific method will be emphasized. It will be Methodology demonstrated throughout as the means by which we can come to know so much about ourselves and the universe around us. Through a series of participatory lectures, based upon pre-assigned readings as well as highly interactive tutorials, the fundamental scientific principles used to explore the universe will be introduced. This will be followed a systematic survey of the cosmos. Extensive use of multimedia visualization aides in the form of computer-based presentation of astronomical phenomena will be made to include graphs, drawings, and photographs. Additionally, software will be used to visually introduce students to objects of interest on the celestial sphere as well as the graphical presentation of important astronomical and physical laws. Throughout the semester, students will participate in exercises that not only teach astronomy but learning-to-learn so as to better prepare themselves for success in the university and after graduation.
Tutorial topics include: 1. Introduction to Stellar Evolution 2. Organization 3. The Sun 4. Measuring the Stars 5. The Interstellar Media 6. Stellar Evolution 7. Neutron Stars and Black Holes
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment Methods/Tasks % Weighting Intended Subject Learning Outcomes 1. Tutorial Performance 40% 2. Participation 20% 3. Mid-term Quizzes 40% Total 100%
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 28 Hours
• Tutorial 14 Hours
Total student study effort: 42 Hours
Reading List and Essential Reading: References 1. E. Chaisson and S. McMillan, Astronomy: A Beginner's Guide to the Universe, 4th ed., Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice-Hall, Inc, 2004.
Reference List:
1. AUTHOR, The Star Almanac for Land Surveyors. London: H.M.S.O., 1998. 2. AUTHOR, Ying Han Tian Wen Xue Ci Hui = English-Chinese Dictionary of Astronomy / Zhu Bian: Xu Bang-Xin. Beijing: Ke Xue Chu Ban She, 1986. 3. G. Che, Listening to the Heavenly Music: Philosopher-Scientist Johannes Kepler, Fu-zhou: Fu-jian jiao yu che ban she, 1994. 4. M.J. Crowe, Theories of the World from Antiquity to the Copernican Revolution, New York: Dover Publications, 1990. 5. C. Cullen, Astronomy and Mathematics in Ancient China: The Zhou Bi Suan Jing, New York: Cambridge University Press, 1996. 6. W. Kaufmann and N. Comins, Discovering the Universe, New York: W.H. Freeman and Company, 1997. 7. Thomas J. Kuhn, The Copernican Revolution: Planetary Astronomy in the Development of Western Thought, Cambridge, MA: Harvard
126
University Press, 1957. 8. J. Maury, Newton: Understanding the Cosmos. London: Thames and Hudson, c1992. 9. C.S. Morphet, Galileo and Copernican Astronomy: A Scientific World View Defined, London: Butterworths, 1977. 10. L. Motz, The Story of Astronomy, New York: Plenum Press, c1995.
127
Subject Description Form
Subject Code GEC270
Subject Title History of Hong Kong 香港史
Credit Value 3
Level 2
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives This subject aims to help students understand the various aspects of Hong Kong from a historical perspective. Traditionally, Hong Kong history has been constrained by both the Euro-centric and Sino-centric historiographies. This subject aims to correct such approaches and to build up a more critical Hong Kong-centred historical method.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes 1. discuss the various historiographical issues regarding the history of Hong Kong; 2. grasp the major events in the history of Hong Kong; 3. engage in the learned discourse on the significance on each of these events; 4. discourse on the issues about Hong Kong historical consciousness and identity; and 5. broaden their understanding of the position of Hong Kong in China and in the world.
Subject Synopsis/ Keyword Syllabus (Indicative): Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction 2. Ancient history of Hong Kong 3. The establishment of the Colonial system (1841-1900) 4. The development of the Chinese community (1841-1900) 5. From the Chinese Revolution to the Canton-Hong Kong General Strike (1900-1930) 6. Pre-war Hong Kong (1930s) 7. The Japanese period and the anti-Japanese resistance movements (1941-1945) 8. Post-war Hong Kong (1945-1965) 9. The Confrontation of 1966 and the Riots of 1967 10. The development of the Hong Kong identity (1967-1997) 11. The social and economic development of Hong Kong up to 1997 12. The impact of the British rule 13. The establishment of the HKSAR and its dilemmas 14. Conclusion
Teaching/ Learning This subject will be divided into lectures and tutorials, both supported with Methodology background readings. The lectures will introduce the various aspects of the historical development of Hong Kong. A multi-disciplinary approach covering politics, sociology, economics and cultural studies will be attempted where appropriate. The tutorials will allow students to tackle, in some depths, certain key elements of Hong Kong history so that they could develop a greater sense of history. Students will also learn to discourse on the issues regarding Hong Kong historical consciousness and identity.
Tutorial topics include: 1. The Hong Kong governors 2. The famous brand names of Hong Kong
128
3. A piece of Hong Kong historical monument 4. An important public institution of Hong Kong 5. A chapter in the development of education in Hong Kong 6. An aspect of religious practice in Hong Kong 7. The Japanese period of Hong Kong 8. The anti-Japanese resistance movements in Hong Kong 9. A chapter in the social development of Hong Kong 10. A chapter in the political development of Hong Kong 11. Impact of British rule in Hong Kong 12. The relationship between Hong Kong and China
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment Methods/Tasks % Weighting Intended Subject Learning Outcomes 1. Tutorial Performance (group oral presentation) 30% 2. Written Report (individual report on one tutorial 30% topic) 3. Final Test (two written questions) 40% Total 100%
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 28 Hours
• Tutorial and Student Presentation 14 Hours
Total student study effort: 42 Hours
Reading List and Reference List: References 1. A. Abbas, “Hong Kong: other histories, other politics.” Public Culture, 9.3:293-313, 1997. 2. H.D.R. Baker, Life in the cities: the emergence of the Hong Kong Man, The China Quarterly 95:469-479, Sept 1983. 3. G. Bickley, The golden needle: the biography of Frederick Stewart (1836- 1889), Hong Kong: David C. Lam Institute for East-West Studies, 1997. 4. S. Blyth, Hong Kong remembers, Hong Kong: Oxford University Press, 1996. 5. M. Bray and W.O. Lee, (eds.), Education and political transition: implications of Hong Kong‘s change of sovereignty, Hong Kong: Hong Kong University Press, 1997. 6. N. Cameron, An illustrated history of Hong Kong, Hong Kong: Oxford University Press, 1991. 7. A. Chan, Li Ka-shing: Hong Kong’s elusive billionaire, Hong Kong: Hong Hong University Press, 1996. 8. K.C. Chan, “History,” in P.K. Choi P.K. and L.S. Ho, (eds.), The other Hong Kong report 1993, Hong Kong: Chinese University Press, 1993. 9. M.K. Chan and A.P. Gerald, (eds.), The Hong Kong reader: passage to Chinese sovereignty, Armonk: M.E. Sharpe, 1996. 10. M.K. Chan, (ed.), Precarious balance: Hong Kong between China and Britain, 1842-1992, Hong Kong: University of Hong Kong Press, 1994. 11. D. Chen and C.M. Cai 陳多、蔡赤萌, Xianggang de jingji 香港的經濟 [The economy of Hong Kong]. v.1. Beijing: Xinhua chubanshe, 1996. 12. R. Chow, “Between colonizers: Hong Kong’s postcolonial self-writing in the 1990s,” Diaspora, 2.2:151-170, 1992. 13. A. Coates, Myself a mandarin: memoirs of a special magistrate, Hong Kong: Oxford University Press, 1968. 14. G.B. Endacott, A history of Hong Kong, Hong Kong: Oxford University Press, 1973; first published, 1958. 15. D. Faure, (ed.), History of Hong Kong 1842-1984, Hong Kong: Tamarind Books, 1995. 16. J. Flowerdew, The final years of British Hong Kong: the discourse of
129
colonial withdrawal, London & New York: Macmillan Press & St Martin’s Press, 1998. 17. J. Hayes, James. (1996). Friends and teachers: Hong Kong and its people 1953-87. Hong Kong: Hong Kong University Press, 1996. 18. S. Hoe, The private life of old Hong Kong, Hong Kong: Oxford University Press, 1991. 19. R. Hughes, Borrowed place, borrowed time: Hong Kong and its many faces, London: Andre Deutsch Limited, 1976, first published 1968. 20. J.Y. Jin, 金堯如, Zhonggong Xianggang zhengce miwen shilu 中共香港政 策秘聞實錄 [Secret records of CCP’s Hong Kong policy]. Hong Kong: Tianyuan shudian, 1998. 21. R.Y.W. Kwok and A.Y. So, (eds.), The Hong Kong-Guangdong link: partnership in flux, Hong Kong: Hong Kong University Press, 1995. 22. S.K. Lau, “The Hong Kong policy of the People’s Republic of China, 1949-1997,” Journal of Contemporary China, 9.2:77-93, 2000. 23. H.J. Lethbridge, Hard graft in Hong Kong: scandal, corruption, the ICAC. Hong Kong: Oxford University Press, 1985. 24. B. Leung, Perspectives on Hong Kong society, Hong Kong: Oxford University Press, 1996. 25. H. Li, 李後. Huigui de licheng 回歸的歷程 [The history of return of Hong Kong], Hong Kong: Joint Publishing Co, 1997. 26. C.K. Liu, 劉存寬, (ed.), Xianggangshi luncong 香港史論叢 [A critical collection on Hong Kong history], Hong Kong: Qilin Books, 1998. 27. S.Y. Liu, “Hong Kong: a survey of its political and economic development over the past 150 years,” China Quarterly, 151:583-592. 28. S.Y. Liu, 劉蜀永, Xianggang di lishi 香港的歷史 [A history of Hong Kong], Beijing: Xinhua chubanshe, 1996. 29. T.L. Lui and W.B. Huang, 呂大樂、黃偉邦, (eds.), Jieji fenxi yu Xianggang 階級分析與香港 [Class analysis and Hong Kong], Hong Kong: Youth Literary Book Store, 1998. 30. H.K. Luk, “Chinese culture in the Hong Kong curriculum: heritage and colonialism,” Comparative Education Review 35.4:650-668, Nov 1991. 31. E.K.W. Ma, Culture, politics, and television in Hong Kong, London: Routledge, 1999. 32. N. Miners, “The normal pattern of decolonisation of British dependent territories” in Peter Wesley-Smith and Albert Chan (eds.) The Basic Law and Hong Kong’s future. Hong Kong: Butterworths, 1988. 33. C. Munn, Anglo-China: Chinese people and British rule in Hong Kong, 1841-1880. London: Curzon Press, 2001. 34. A. Pennycook, English and the discourses of colonialism, London and New York: Routledge, 1998. 35. E. Sinn, (ed.), Between east and west: aspects of social and political development in Hong Kong. Hong Kong: University of Hong Kong Press, 1990. 36. E. Sinn, 冼玉儀, (ed.), Xianggang wenhua yu shehui 香港文化與社會 [Culture and society in Hong Kong]. Hong Kong: Centre of Asian Studies, 1995. 37. H.F. Siu, “Remade in Hong Kong: weaving into the Chinese cultural tapestry”, in Tao Tao Liu and David Faure (eds.) Unity and diversity: local cultures and identities in China, Hong Kong: Hong Kong University Press, 1996. 38. R. Spurr, Excellency: the governors of Hong Kong. Hong Kong: FormAsia, 1995. 39. K. Topley, “British rule in Hong Kong: from 1841 to the Sino-British Joint Declaration of 1984” in Albert H. Yee (ed.) Whither Hong Kong: China’s shadow or visionary gleam? Lanham: University Press of America, 1999. 40. S. Tsang, A modern history of Hong Kong, Hong Kong: Hong Kong University Press, 2004. 41. G.W. Wang, 王賡武, (ed.), Xianggangshi xinpian 香港史新編 [Hong Kong history: new perspectives] v.1 and v.2. Hong Kong: Joint Publishing Co, 1997. 42. D. Waters, “Hong Kong hongs with long histories and British connections,” Journal of Hong Kong Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society. 30:219-256, 1990.
130
43. P. Wesley-Smith, Unequal treaty, 1898-1997: China, Great Britain, and Hong Kong’s New Territories. Hong Kong: Oxford University Press, 1980, revised edition, 1998. 44. T.W.P. Wong, Colonial governance and the Hong Kong story, Hong Kong: Hong Kong Institute of Asia-Pacific Studies, 1998. 45. W.C. Wong, 王宏志, [H.Z. Wang], Lishi de chenzhong 歷史的沉重 [The burden of history], Hong Kong: Oxford University Press, 2000. 46. J.T. Xu, 許家屯, Xu Jiatun Xianggang huiyilu 許家屯香港憶錄 [Recollections of Hong Kong], v.1 & 2, Hong Kong: Xianggang Lianhebao chubanshe, 1993. 47. J. Yang, 楊奇. (1996). Xianggang gailun 香港概論 [Introduction to Hong Kong] v.1 and 2, Beijing: Zhongguo shehui kexue chubanshe, 1996. 48. S.W. Yu and S.Y. Liu, 余繩武、劉蜀永, (eds.), Ershi shiji de Xianggang 二十世紀的香港 [Hong Kong in the 20th century], Beijing: Qilin Books, 1994. 49. J.W. Zhang, 張家偉. Xianggang liuqi baodong neiqing 香港六七暴動內情 [Inside story of 1967 riot in Hong Kong], Hong Kong: The Pacific Century Press, 2000.
131
Subject Description Form
Subject Code IC291
Subject Title Practical Training
Credit Value 5 Training Credits
Level 2
Pre-requisite/Co- Nil requisite/Exclusion
Objectives The objective of this subject is to provide hands-on technical training to students with focus on multimedia electronic product fabrication and development. Training on practical scientific computing software will also be provided. Practical training will be conducted in Industrial Centre (IC) of the university to prepare student for a professional career.
Intended Learning Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Outcomes a) design and fabricate multimedia electronic product prototype for demonstration, development and experimentation purposes; b) use electronic design automation software to product circuit and perform simple PCB design; c) understand, specify and explain contemporary pragmatic manufacturing processes, interconnects and assembly methods for simple multimedia electronic product; d) prescribe and perform parametric test, analysis and troubleshooting of simple electronic circuits; and e) use scientific computation software in academic study.
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcomes 2: This subject contributes to the programme Outcomes outcome through practical training on professional practice in the design and development of Internet and multimedia electronic products. • Programme Outcomes 4: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through teaching and training in scientific computing software and programming practice. • Programme Outcomes 6: This subject contributes to the programmme outcome through practical training in electronic product fabrication. • Programme Outcome 7: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through practical training in electronic and microcontroller practice including simple computer game interfaces.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcomes 9, 10, 12: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through practical training in student groups. Students should be able to work and demonstrate their team work skill, communication ability, present ideas and practise on creative process through working with each others in projects that are encountered in practical training. In the group project, students should be able to practise collaboration and leadership skills. • Programme Outcome 13: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through induction on the importance of training, responsibility and ethics for a professional in science and engineering.
132 Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Electronic Practice for Electronic and Information Engineering (TM1106 – 30 hours) 1.1 Introduction to electronics and its products, cost factors and technical aspects. Introduction to common electronic circuits and components, soldering and desoldering techniques. Introduction to surface mount techniques, choices & properties of related materials. 1.2 PCB design, circuit artwork, etching process, prototype PCB fabrication. Hands on practice of PCB circuit design in EDA environment. Use of basic test instruments. Mounting and installation of electronic circuits, wiring of subassemblies. 1.3 Training and practice in programming PC interface control. 1.4 Training and practice in embedded device programming.
2. Advanced Electronic Practice with Multimedia Application (TM1109 – 60 hours) 2.1. Training in design modification from circuit prototype for multimedia application. 2.2. Embedded device programming practice for multimedia electronic product. 2.3. Multimedia electronic product prototype fabrication. 2.4. Testing and troubleshooting techniques in multimedia electronic product. 2.5. Project presentation using Internet.
3. Basic Scientific Computing (TM3012 - 27 hours) 3.1. Introduction to MATLAB; interactive calculations, random number generators, variables, vectors, matrices and string; mathematical operations, polynomial operation, data analysis and curve fitting, file I/O functions. 3.2. Basic plotting, formatting graph, 2D and 3D plots, annotations, contour, mesh and surface plots, colormap. 3.3. M-file programming & debugging; scripts, functions, logic operations, flow control and graphic user interfaces.
4. Microcomputer Application and Practice (TM1110 – 30 hours) 4.1. Introduction to Microchip Microcomputer families and development tools. 4.2. Hands-on practice on memory, I/O, data communications, ADC operations. 4.3. Hands-on practice on LED and LCD displays. 4.4. Hands-on practice on motor control and sensors. 4.5. Application of Microcomputer on consumer electronic products, mechatronics, home automation products, wired and wireless connectivity.
Training Pattern:
TM1106: Year 1, Summer TM1109: Year 1, Summer TM3012: Year 1, Term 1 TM1110: Year 1, Summer
133
Learning The teaching and learning approach is based on practical workshop training Methodology arranged in modules and it can be broadly divided into two parts based on their contents; practice in multimedia electronic product and scientific computing: (i) Training in multimedia electronic product practice will enable student to learn the requirement of practical electronic product fabrication, appreciate the fabrication process so as to create, develop and integrate their knowledge into future design. On completion of the training, student should be able to manage the fabrication of multimedia electronic product prototype for design and development.
In module TM1106, student will learn the basics of electronic product construction practice, printed circuit assembly prototype construction skills, techniques and best practice of the electronic industry. Training activities will include tutorials, practical assignments, test and report. In module TM1110, student will work on microcomputer programming for embedded application.
In module TM1109, students will participate in training groups under an industrial environment with an objective to produce a prototype of electronic product. The product will normally contain multimedia feature with embedded controller. Student will develop the product under an electronic design automation environment and tackle different parts of product design so as to produce a working prototype for demonstration. Student will experience practical problems that are commonly encountered in the electronic industry during product development. Student will derive solutions to overcome difficulties, produce deliverables for the project in a given time frame. Individual merit will be assessed together with group performance. As such, the training task and activities will be organized in a way to enable a clear identification of work involved while allowing students to work independently and in groups for assessment.
Besides fabrication technologies and prototype implementation, students should be able to cultivate their personal quality, creativity, management skills and leadership in teamwork collaborations. Tutorials and inductions will be provided as require. In addition to the quality and output of the practical tasks such as PCB assembly fabrication, chassis fabrication, prototype testing and demonstration, assessment will include creativeness and a web site for product presentation on the Internet.
(ii) TM3012 will provide an opportunity for student to learn and use a popular scientific computing tool, MatLab for their study.
134
Assessment Methods in Alignment with Intended Learning Intended Learning % Outcomes Assessed Outcomes Assessment Methods Weighting
a b c d e
1. Assignment / Project 30%
2. Test 30%
3. Reports & Logbook 40%
Total 100%
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Assessment Methods Remarks
Assignment/ Project The projects are designed to facilitate students to reflect and apply the knowledge periodically throughout the training. Test Test is designed to facilitate students to review the breadth and depth of their understanding on specific topics. Reports & Logbook Report writing is designed to facilitate students to acquire deep understanding on the topics of the training and to present those concepts clearly.
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected . Lecture/Tutorial 25 Hours
. Workshop 122 Hours
Other student study effort:
. Workshop 8 Hours
Total student study effort: 155 Hours
Reading List and Reference Reading List: References 1. H. Moore, MATLAB for Engineers, 2nd ed., Prentice-Hall/Pearson, 2009. 2. R.S. Villanucci, A.W. Avtgis, W. F. Megow, Electronic Technques: Shop Practices and Construction, 6th ed., Practice-Hall, 1999. 3. IPC-D-279-1996, Design Guidelines for Reliable Surface Mount Technology Printed Board Assemblies, IPC. 4. IPC-J-STD-001E-2010, Requirements for Soldered Electrical and Electronic Assemblies, IPC. 5. IPC-A-610E-2010, Acceptability of Electronic Assemblies, IPC.
Reference Software List:
1. PADS from Mentor Graphics Inc. 2. LabVIEW from National Instrument 3. MPLAB from Microchip Corp 4. MATLAB from The Mathworks
135 Subject Description Form
Subject Code MM2021
Subject Title Management and Organisation
Credit Value 3
Level 2
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite
Exclusion Engineering Management (ENG306) or People and Management (MM2191)
Objectives This subject contributes to the achievement of the programme outcomes by enabling students with an understanding of management functions, group and individual dynamics within organisations and to apply such concepts to analyse and solve problems in business situations. The subject also provides students with knowledge and skills in leadership, teamwork, and decision making. In addition, it prepares students on how to analyse and resolve ethical issues in various business settings.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes 1. explain the nature of managerial work in a variety of forms of organisations, and analyse the impact of the external environments, both domestic and global, on managers’ jobs; 2. explain and analyze the functions of management in organisations, i.e. planning, organising, leading, and controlling; 3. apply the essence of human behaviour in teamwork, leadership, and decision making and evaluate the implications for the management of organisations; 4. analyse and compare the arguments surrounding social responsibility and ethical behaviour in organisations and businesses.
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcomes 1, 2 & 5: identify and analyse the functions of Outcomes management in organisations, i.e. planning, organising, leading, and controlling. • Programme Outcomes 3, 4 & 6: solve and evaluate the practical management problems pertaining to the business environment. • Programme Outcome 7: apply the management concepts and models in a variety of forms of organisations, and analyse the impact of the external environments.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcomes 9 & 10: provide an opportunity to present ideas and findings clearing, and think critically and creatively. • Programme Outcomes 11 & 12: collaborate effectively with other members in a team and demonstrate self-learning and life-long learning capability with the foundations for continual professional development in management field. • Programme Outcome 13: realise the issues on cultural diversity, globalization, and social responsibility and ethics in business organisations.
Subject Synopsis/ Indicative Contents: Indicative Syllabus 1. Management Functions The major elements of the management functions: planning, organising,
136 leading, and controlling, and their importance for the effective management of business organisations.
2. Planning Foundations of planning. Decision making and problem solving. Global business environment. Strategic management.
3. Organising an Enterprise Review of a variety of organisational structures and the identification of the conditions under which they are appropriate. Managerial communication and information technology. Staffing and human resource management.
4. Leading The manager’s role as a leader. Foundations of human behaviour. Leading and motivating employees – individuals and groups.
5. Controlling Foundations of control. Operations and quality management. Controlling for organisational performance.
6. Social Responsibility and Managerial Ethics Arguments for and against social responsibility as a business objective. Factors affecting managerial ethics. Approaches to improving ethical behaviour.
Teaching/ Learning Teaching / Learning Approach: Methodology The two-hour weekly lecture will be structured to guide and promote students’ understanding of relevant management and organisation concepts. In addition, there will be one tutorial of one hour per week. The tutorials will adopt a student of centred approach, including case study, in-class exercises, newspaper and professional articles for discussion and team-presentation.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment % Intended Subject Learning Methods/ Task Outcomes to be Assessed Intended Subject Weighting Learning Outcomes (Please tick as appropriate) 1 2 3 4
1. Continuous Assessment (total 50%) • Individual Work 20%
• Group Project 15% • Participation 15%
2. Examination 50% Total 100%
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes: To pass this subject, students are required to obtain Grade D or above in both the Continuous Assessment and Examination components.
The various methods are designed to ensure that all students taking this subject –
• Read the key chapters of the recommended textbooks and indicative journals in subject outline; • Demonstrate the basic understanding of management functions which are presented in the lectures; • Analyse business situations and problems in contemporary business
137 settings; • Identity teamwork, leadership and decision making process in the business environment; • Discuss the ethical issues arising from the cases and other questions; • Participate in in-class exercises, case study, professional articles or discussion question to be presented in the lectures.
Feedback is given to students immediately following the presentations and all students are invited to join this discussion.
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 28 Hours
• Tutorial 14 Hours
Other student study effort:
• Preparation for lectures/ seminars 42 Hours • Preparation for individual work/ group project/ 42 Hours examination
Total student study effort: 126 Hours
Reading List and Recommended Textbooks: References 1. S.P. Robbins and M. Coulter, Management, 10th ed., Prentice-Hall, 2009. 2. Jones and George, Essentials of Contemporary Management, 3rd ed., McGraw-Hill, 2009. 3. R.L. Daft, New Era of Management, 9th ed., South-Western Cengage Learning, 2009. 4. Bateman and Snell, Management – Leading & Collaborating in the Competitive World, 8th ed., McGraw-Hill, 2009.
References:
1. Hill and McShane, Principles of Management, 1st ed., McGraw-Hill, 2008. 2. Kinicki and Williams, Management, 3rd ed., McGraw-Hill, 2008. 3. DuBrin, Essentials of Management, 8th ed., South-Western Publishing, 2009. 4. Daft and Marcic, Understanding Management, 6th ed., South-Western Publishing, 2009. 5. Kreitner, Management, 11th ed., South-Western Publishing, 2009. 6. Lussier, Management Fundamentals, 4th ed., South-Western Publishing, 2009. 7. Hitt, Black, Porter, Management, 2nd ed., Prentice-Hall, 2009.
Indicative Periodicals & Newspapers Readings:
1. Company Annual Reports 2. The Asian Wall Street Journal 3. The Economist 4. South China Morning Post 5. Business Week
Indicative Journal Readings:
1. Academy of Management Journal 2. Academy of Management Review 3. Asia Pacific Journal of Management
138 4. Journal of Management 5. Journal of Organizational Behaviour 6. Human Relations
139 Subject Description Form
Subject Code MM2711
Subject Title Introduction to Marketing
Credit Value 3
Level 2
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite
Exclusion Marketing and the Consumer (MM2791)
Objectives This core subject introduces the basic principles and concepts of Marketing. It also provides an analytical foundation for further study of Marketing.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes 1. analyse diverse marketing situations and identify marketing opportunities and threats; 2. apply marketing theories and models to practical marketing situations (e.g., e-retailing); 3. evaluate ethical issues from a marketing perspective and suggest appropriate actions; 4. analyse and/or suggest ways to create value in goods and services and effectively deliver or communicate these to customers; and 5. critically select and manage information, develop and present coherent arguments on marketing issues.
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness Programme • Programme Outcomes 9,10,11,12, 13: This subject provides students with Outcomes the opportunity to evaluate ethical marketing issues. It also provides students with the opportunity to work with others in analysing and presenting the group’s views on a case/marketing situation.
Subject Synopsis/ Indicative Contents: Indicative Syllabus 1. Fundamentals of Modern Marketing Marketing in the modern organization, types of marketing, overview of the marketing process, strategic marketing planning, introduction to the marketing mix, developing competitive advantages.
2. Analysing Marketing Structure and Behaviour Global and competitive marketing environment, consumer and organization markets and their buying behaviour.
3. Researching and Planning of Marketing Activities Marketing research and audit, marketing information system, marketing planning and forecasting.
4. Selecting Market Opportunities Market segmentation, market targeting, product positioning, pricing, promotion and distribution.
5. Introduction to the Marketing Mix Product, Pricing, Promotion and Distribution.
6. Marketing and society Social and Marketing ethics: marketing impacts on individual consumers,
140 society and other businesses.
Teaching/ Learning Teaching / Learning Approach: Methodology The two-hour weekly lecture aims to guide and promote students’ understanding of relevant concepts. The weekly one-hour tutorial activities include discussions on case studies, contemporary marketing topics and journal articles. Students will also work in groups to prepare and make presentations, and to critique the work presented by others. Emphasis is placed throughout on the application of theory to the solution of practical and realistic marketing problems in the local and the global setting.
Teaching and Intended Remarks Learning Method Subject Learning Outcome
Lectures 1,2,3,4,5 -
Tutorials 1,2,3,4,5 -
Presentations 1,2,3,4,5 -
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment % Intended Subject Learning Methods/ Task Outcomes to be Assessed Intended Subject Weighting Learning Outcomes (Please tick as appropriate) 1 2 3 4 5
1. Continuous 50% Assessment • Individual essay
• Group project(s) and presentation
• Individual contribution to class discussions 2. Examination 50%
Total 100%
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes: To pass this subject, students are required to obtain Grade D or above in both the Continuous Assessment and Examination components.
Specific Assessment Remarks Methods/ Task
Individual essay This tests students’ ability to evaluate whether a company’s marketing activity is unethical and to offer solutions.
Group project(s) and This requires students to work with others in presentation analysing a problem/situation and to communicate the group’s views to others.
Individual contribution This measures students’ ability to evaluate to class discussions information and to develop their own opinions.
Examination This tests understanding and application of theories and concepts learnt.
141 Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 28 Hours
• Seminar 14 Hours
Total student study effort: 42 Hours
Reading List and Recommended Textbook: References 1. D. Grewal, and M. Levy, Marketing, 3rd ed., New York, McGraw-Hill/Irwin, 2011.
References:
1. G. Armstrong and P. Kotler, Marketing – An Introduction. 10th ed., New Jersey, Prentice-Hall, 2010. 2. R.A. Kerin., S.W. Hartley, W. Rudelius and G.T. Lau, Marketing in Asia, Singapore, McGraw-Hill, 2009. 3. P. Kotler, G. Armstrong, S.H. Ang, S.M. Leong, C.T. Tan and O.H.M. Yau, Principles of Marketing – A Global Perspective, Singapore, Prentice-Hall, 2009.
Various newspapers, magazines, journal articles and web addresses will be referenced.
142 Subject Description Form
Subject Code SD2492
Subject Title Product Design and Social Considerations
Credit Value 3
Level 2
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives Social factors are important in product design. Through a research and design project, students will be able to obtain a fundamental concept and experience in design, in particular considering the social factors. Local contexts related to Hong Kong and Chinese mainland are emphasized in this subject.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Professional skills 1. develop fundamental skills in product design. 2. identify social factors/issues related to a particular design or everyday topic. 3. identify the relationship among users, society and design. 4. conduct research to explore a particular topic related to daily life and product design. 5. generate design solution(s) to solve a specific problem. 6. present their design ideas by using 2-D and 3-D methods.
Transferable skills 7. apply the research and design experience related to social consideration in other related subjects and future career.
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcome 6: Appreciate and identify factors/issues related to Outcomes product/industrial design
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcome 9: Communicate effectively, and present ideas and findings clearly in oral and written forms • Programme Outcome 10: Understand the creative process • Programme Outcome 12: Collaborate effectively with other members in a team, and demonstrate leadership capability • Programme Outcome 13: Recognize social responsibility and ethics
Subject Synopsis/ Indicative Contents: Indicative Syllabus 1. Recent cultural, social and industrial changes 2. Social factors in design 3. Cultures and society 4. Subcultures and design 5. Daily activities and design 6. User, design and designer 7. Policy, implementation and management in design 8. Fundamental inclusive and universal concepts in design 9. Fundamental social/design research
143 Teaching/ Learning Each student is required to conduct research and identify a design project. The Methodology project activities include:
1. Investigation of a current social issue 2. Identification of a design need and title 3. Proposal of design solution(s) 4. Presentation(s): 2-D and 3-D
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment % Intended Subject Learning Methods/ Task Outcomes to be Assessed Intended Subject Weighting Learning Outcomes (Please tick as appropriate) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
• Design project: 20% investigation in design (local context) • Design project: 25% application in design
• Design project: 40% development of design ideas • Design project: 15% presentation of design ideas Total 100%
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Coursework (design project): 100%
1. The ability to carry out an independent investigation related to social issues of product design, in particular related to the local context (20%). 2. The ability to apply findings in design project (25%). 3. The ability to develop design ideas (40%). 4. The ability to present design ideas (visual and verbal) (15%).
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture/Seminar 21 Hours
• Tutorial/Exercise 21 Hours
Other student study effort:
• Research and design 28 Hours
• Preparation of presentation 10 Hours
Total student study effort: 80 Hours
Reading List and Indicative References: References 1. P. Alasuutari, Researching Culture: Qualitative Method and Cultural Studies, London, Thousand Oaks, New Delhi: Sage Publications, 1995. 2. W.E. Bijker, Of Bicycle, Bakelites, and Bulbs: Toward a Theory of Sociotechnical Change, Cambridge, Mass., London: The MIT Press, 1995. 3. D. Mackenzie, Green Design: Design for the Environment, 2nd ed., London: Laurence King, 1997. 4. D.A. Norman, The Design of Everyday Things, London: The MIT Press, 1998. 5. Victor V. Papanek, The Green Imperative: Ecology and Ethics in Design and
144 Architecture, New York: Thames & Hudson, 1995. 6. N. Stanton, Human Factors in Consumer Products, London: Taylor & Francis, 1998. 7. P. Sparke, An Introduction to Design and Culture: 1900 to the Present, London: Routledge, 2004. 8. N. Whiteley, Design for Society, London: Reaktion Books, 1993.
Journals:
1. Design Issues 2. The Design Studies 3. The Design Journal 4. The International Journal of Design 5. Journal of Popular Culture 6. Popular Culture Review
145 Subject Description Form
Subject Code EIE320
Subject Title Object-Oriented Design and Programming
Credit Value 3
Level 3
Pre-requisite Computer Programming (ENG236)
Co-requisite/ Nil Exclusion
Objectives This subject will provide students with the principles of object orientation from the perspective of Java implementation and UML. Students are expected to learn the concepts of and practical approaches to object-oriented analysis, design and programming using UML and Java.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. Understand the principles of object oriented design. 2. Apply Java in object oriented software development. 3. Apply UML in object oriented software modeling. 4. Apply object oriented approach to developing computer software.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness 5. Learn independently and be able to search for the information required in solving problems. 6. Present ideas and findings effectively. 7. Think critically. 8. Work in a team and collaborate effectively with others.
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcome 1: This subject contributes to the programme Outcomes outcome through teaching of the principles of object oriented design and providing the students with an opportunity to identify the different aspects of Internet and multimedia systems. • Programme Outcome 2: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through designing of object oriented programming applications and providing the students with an opportunity to design and implement digital systems related to Internet and multimedia technologies. • Programme Outcome 4: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing opportunity for students to apply computer programming techniques to solve practical engineering problems pertaining to the field of object oriented programming. • Programme Outcome 6: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through designing of object oriented programming applications to appreciate and identify factors/issues related to software design, and generate design solutions to solve a specific problem.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcome 9: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through presentations and exchange of design ideas in mini- project to communicate effectively, and present ideas and findings clearly in oral and written forms. • Programme Outcome 10: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing opportunity for students working on different Java programming problems to think critically and creatively.
146
• Programme Outcome 11: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through taking up new programming technology to demonstrate self-learning and life-long learning capability. • Programme Outcome 12: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing the opportunity for students working on mini- projects to collaborate effectively with other members in a team, and demonstrate leadership capability.
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction to Software Engineering Software products; software processes; software process models.
2. Java Programming Basic Java technologies; Java platform; Java language basic: variables, operators, expressions, statements, blocks, control flow, methods, arrays.
3. Object-Oriented Programming with Java Objects and classes; class definition; fields, constructors and methods; object interaction; grouping objects; array and collections; designing classes; inheritance and polymorphism; managing inheritance: creating subclasses and super-classes, hiding member variables, overriding methods. Interfaces and packages.
4. Web Programming with Java Java applets: creating custom applet subclasses, create interactive applets using Java Swing. Java Servlets: architecture of servlets, client interaction, life cycle of servlets, saving client states; servlet communications, session tracking, and using server resources.
5. Unified Modelling Language (UML) Purposes of modelling. Structural Modelling: classes, relationships, class Diagrams, interfaces, packages, and object diagrams. Behavioural modelling interactions, use cases, use case diagrams, interaction diagrams, activity diagrams, events, signals, processes and threads. Architectural modelling: components, deployment, collaborations, patterns, frameworks, component diagrams, and deployment diagrams. Mapping UML diagrams to Java Code.
Laboratory Experiment:
1. Laboratory Work Students will implement an on-line shopping system using Java Servlets and Tomcat Web server. Students will use a UML software tool to write requirement specifications and design documents for the on-line shopping system.
2. Practical Work Students will be requested to write and debug Java programs during tutorial and lab sessions.
147
Teaching/ Learning Methodology Teaching and Intended Remarks Learning Method Subject Learning Outcome Lectures 1, 2, 3 fundamental principles and key concepts of the subject are delivered to students
MC Quizzes 1, 2, 3 students’ knowledge on/understanding of certain topics can be easily estimated, and the corresponding teaching time will be adjusted accordingly Tutorials 1,2,4,5,6 supplementary to lectures and are conducted with smaller class size; students will be able to clarify concepts through developing simple Java programs. Laboratory 4,5,7 Students will need to design, develop, sessions test, and document Java programs. Mini-project 3,4,5,7,8 Students in groups of 2-3 are required to build a 3-tier online shopping software. They will also need to use UML to document their software.
148
Alignment of Assessment and Specific % Intended Subject Learning Assessment Outcomes to be Assessed Intended Subject Weighting Learning Outcomes Methods/ Task (Please tick as appropriate) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. Continuous 40% Assessment • Short quizzes • Assignments • Laboratory sessions • Mini-project • Test 2. Examination 60% Total 100%
The continuous assessment consists of a number of short quizzes, programming assignments, a mini-project, laboratory reports and a mid-term test.
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in
assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Specific Assessment Remark Methods/Tasks Short quizzes Multiple choices and true/false questions will be used to test and enhance students’
understanding about the topics covered in lectures. Assignments Students will be asked to write Java programs and test the programs. They will also need to use UML diagram to illustrate the structure of their programs. Students will need to think critically and creatively in order to come up with a good solution for an existing problem. Laboratory sessions and Each group of students are required to mini-project produce a written report. Students will be accessed based on (1) the quality of their programs and (2) the clarity of their reports. In the mini-project, students will need to work as a team to solve a complex problem. Each of them will be responsible for part of the software. Test and Exam End-of-chapter problems will be used to evaluate students’ ability in applying concepts and skills learnt in the classroom
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 24 Hours
• Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes 18 hours
Other student study effort:
149
• Lecture: preview/review of notes; 36 Hours homework/assignment; preparation for test/quizzes/examination • Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes: preview of 27 Hours materials, revision and/or reports writing Total student study effort: 105 Hours
Reading List and Textbooks: References 1. G. Booch, I. Jacobson and J. Rumbaugh, The Unified Modeling Language User Guide, 2nd Edition, Addison-Wesley, 2005. 2. D.J. Barnes and M. Kolling, Objects First with Java: A Practical Introduction using BlueJ, 4th Edition, Prentice-Hall, 2008.
Reference Books:
1. H.M. Deitel and P.J. Deitel, Java: How To Program, 8th ed., Prentice-Hall, 2010. 2. R.C. Lee and W.M. Tepfenhart, Practical Object-Oriented Development with UML and Java, Prentice-Hall, 2003. 3. J. Rumbaugh, I. Jacobson and G. Booch, The Unified Modeling Language Reference Manual, 2nd Edition, Addison-Wesley, 2004. 4. http://java.sum.com.
150
Subject Description Form
Subject Code EIE328
Subject Title Digital Signal Processing for Multimedia Applications
Credit Value 3
Level 3
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives This subject provides students with the concepts of using digital signal processing techniques for multimedia applications. After the completion of the subject, the student should be able to appreciate a wide range of techniques and standards adopted in the multimedia industry.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. Understand the concepts of using digital signal processing techniques for multimedia applications. 2. Understand the formats of different multimedia signals. 3. Understand the fundamentals of using digital signal processing techniques for different multimedia standards and the technologies. 4. Perform multimedia authoring, and to process and integrate different types of signals to form multimedia presentations.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness 5 Communicate effectively. 6 Learn independently.
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcome 1: This subject contributes to the programme Outcomes outcome through the teaching of the theories and concepts of digital signal processing and through providing the students with an opportunity to apply their knowledge. • Programme Outcome 3: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through teaching the different ways of analyzing multimedia signals. • Programme Outcome 4: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through the teaching of software tools for integrating multimedia signals.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcome 11 This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing students with the foundations for life-long learning and continual professional development in the areas of digital signal processing and multimedia systems.
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction Perspective of multimedia computing and communications, review of the key enabling technologies, overview of multimedia system requirements and multimedia software tools.
2. Digital Signal Processing for Multimedia Compression Media and data streams. DSP for multimedia processing and coding. DSP for image processing and coding and audio coding.
151
3. Multimedia Compression Standards JPEG, JPEG 2000, MPEG-1, MPEG-2, and MPEG-4. Audio coding standards.
4. Multimedia Information Indexing and Retrieval MPEG7, Content-based retrieval(CBR) in image database, some existing CBR systems/applications. Digital libraries.
5. Tools for Multimedia Integration Multimedia authoring: multimedia production and presentation, Synchronized Multimedia Integration Language (SMIL)/Virtual Reality Modelling Language (VRML): concept, structure, timelines, synchronization, implementation.
6. Digital Signal Processing for Multimedia Communications Quality of service (QOS) requirements for multimedia communications. Traffic modelling of multimedia sources. Application example.
7. Case Studies DVD player, Digital video cameras, Digital video cassette recorder, and/or MP3 Player
Laboratory Experiments:
1. Developing Simple Multimedia Applications using SMIL 2. Developing Interactive Multimedia Applications using SMIL 3. Developing 3D Multimedia Applications using VRML 4. Analysis of image/video coding
Teaching/ Learning Methodology Teaching and Intended Remarks Learning Method Subject Learning Outcome Lectures 1, 2, 3, 4 fundamental principles and key concepts of the subject are delivered to students
Tutorials 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, supplementary to lectures; 6 students will be able to clarify concepts and to have a deeper understanding of the lecture material;
problems and application examples are given and discussed Laboratory sessions 4, 5, 6 students will make use of the various software tools to perform multimedia authoring.
152
Alignment of Assessment and Specific % Intended Subject Learning Assessment Outcomes to be Assessed (Please Intended Subject Weighting Learning Outcomes Methods/ Task tick as appropriate) 1 2 3 4 5 6
1. Continuous Assessment (total 40%) • Laboratory 10% sessions
• Short quizzes 10%
• Tests 20%
2. Examination 60%
Total 100%
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Specific Assessment Remark Methods/Tasks Short quizzes mainly objective tests conducted to measure the students’ understanding of the theories
and concepts as well as their comprehension of subject materials Tests and examination end-of chapter type problems used to evaluate students’ ability in applying concepts and skills learnt in the classroom; students need to think critically and creatively in order to come with an alternate solution for an existing problem
Laboratory sessions oral examination based on the laboratory exercises will be conducted to evaluate student’s technical knowledge and communication skills
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 24 Hours
• Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes 18 hours
Other student study effort:
• Lecture: preview/review of notes; 36 Hours homework/assignment; preparation for test/quizzes/examination • Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes: preview of 27 Hours materials, revision and/or reports writing Total student study effort: 105 Hours
Reading List and Reference Books: References 1. M. Mandal, Multimedia Signals and Systems, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2003. 2. F. Halsall, Multimedia Communications: Applications, Networks, Protocols and Standards, Addison-Wesley, 2001. 3. Z.N. Li and Mark S. Drew, Fundamentals of Multimedia, Prentice-Hall, 153 2004. 4. C.H. Wu and J.D. Irwin, Emerging Multimedia Computer Communication Technologies, Prentice-Hall, 1998. 5. B. Furht, S.W. Smoliar and H.J. Zhang, Video and Image Processing in Multimedia Systems, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1995.
154 Subject Description Form
Subject Code EIE341
Subject Title Signals and Systems
Credit Value 3
Level 3
Pre-requisite Mathematics I (AMA227)
Co-requisite/ Nil Exclusion
Objectives 1. To provide students with basic concepts and techniques for the modelling and analysis of signals and systems. 2. To provide students with an analytical foundation for further studies in Communication Engineering and Digital Signal Processing.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. Understand the representations and classifications of the signals and systems. 2. Understand the modelling of linear systems. 3. Use different techniques to analyze and design systems. 4. Apply software tools to laboratory exercises for experimenting with theories, and to the analysis and design of signals and systems. 5. Appreciate the advantages and disadvantages of using the different representations and modelling approaches.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness 6. Present ideas and findings effectively. 7. Think critically and learn independently. 8. Work in a team and collaborate effectively with others.
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcomes 2: This subject contributes to the programme Outcomes outcome through the teaching of the theories and concepts of signals and systems and through providing the students with an opportunity to apply their knowledge. • Programme Outcome 3: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through teaching the different ways of analyzing signals and modelling systems. • Programme Outcome 4: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through the teaching of software tools for analyzing signals and systems.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness
• Programme Outcomes 9, 12: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing students with laboratory exercises to analyze
signals and system responses. • Programme Outcome 11: This subject contributes to the programme
outcome by providing students with the foundations for life-long learning and continual professional development in the areas of signal processing and linear systems.
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Signal Representation Signal Classification, Continuous and Discrete-Time Signals. Time-Domain 155 and Frequency-Domain Representations.
2. Continuous-Time and Discrete-Time Systems Impulse Representation and Convolution, Linear Time-Invariant Systems. Properties of Systems: Causality, Time Invariance, Linearity, Systems with Memory. LTI Systems: Convolution Representation, Difference Equation Representation.
3. Fourier Representations for Signals Concept of Frequency and Spectrum, Frequency Domain Representation of Discrete-Time signals, Discrete Fourier Series, Discrete-time Fourier Transform, Discrete Fourier Transform, Relationship Between Various Fourier Transforms.
4. System Analysis Frequency Response of LTI systems, Concept of Filtering – Lowpass, Bandpass and Highpass Filters, FIR Filters and IIR Filters, Linear and Circular convolution, FIR Filter Analysis, Filtering Examples to Different signals
5. z-Transform Definition and Properties of z-Transform, Inverse z-Transform: Power Series Expansion, Partial-Fraction Expansion. Z-Transfer Analysis of LTI systems.
Laboratory Experiments:
1. Fundamentals of Signals 2. Linear Time-Invariant Systems 3. Fourier Analysis of Discrete-time Signals 4. Sampling 5. Convolution and Correlation 6. Application of FIR Filters
Teaching/ Learning Methodology Teaching and Intended Remarks Learning Method Subject Learning Outcome Lectures 1, 2, 3, 5 Fundamental principles and key concepts of the subject are delivered to students.
Tutorials 1, 2, 3, 5, 7 These are supplementary to lectures; students will be able to clarify concepts and to gain a deeper understanding of the lecture material; problems and application examples are given and discussed. Laboratory sessions 4, 6, 7, 8 Students will make use of the software MATLAB and/or LabView to simulate various theories and visualize the results.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific % Intended Subject Learning Assessment Outcomes to be Assessed Intended Subject Weighting Learning Outcomes Methods/ Task (Please tick as appropriate) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. Continuous
156 Assessment
(total 40%)
• Laboratory 10% sessions • Short quizzes 10% • Tests 20% 2. Examination 60% Total 100%
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Specific Assessment Remark Methods/Tasks
Short quizzes These can measure the students’ understanding of the theories and concepts as
well as their comprehension of subject materials.
Tests and examination End-of-chapter-type problems are used to evaluate the students’ ability in applying concepts and skills learnt in the classroom;
students need to think critically and to learn
independently in order to come up with an alternative solution to an existing problem. Laboratory sessions Oral examination based on the laboratory exercises will be conducted to evaluate student’s technical knowledge and communication skills.
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 24 Hours
• Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes 18 hours
• Other student study effort: Lecture: preview/review of notes; 36 Hours homework/assignment; preparation for test/quizzes/examination 1. Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes: preview of 27 Hours materials, revision and/or reports writing • Total student study effort: 105 Hours
Reading List and References: References 1. Ed. Kamen and Bonnie Heck, Fundamentals of Signals and Systems Using the Web and Matlab, 2/e, Prentice-Hall, 2000. 2. Simon Haykin and Barry Van Veen, Signals and Systems, Wiley, 2003. 3. M.J. Roberts, Signals and Systems: Analysis Using Transform Methods and MATLAB, McGraw-Hill, 2003. 4. Charles L. Phillips, et al., Signals, Systems, and Transforms, 3/e, Prentice- Hall, 2003.
157 Subject Description Form
Subject Code EIE342
Subject Title Computer Networks
Credit Value 3
Level 3
Pre-requisite Telecommunication Technologies (EIE325)
Co-requisite Nil
Exclusion Data and Computer Communications (EIE442)
Objectives 1. To provide a solid foundation to the students about architectural concepts of data communications and computer networking 2. To enable the students to master the knowledge about data communications and computer networking in the context of real-life applications 3. To prepare the students for understanding, evaluating critically, and assimilating new knowledge and emerging technology about computer networks 4. To enable the students to understand
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. Describe the services, functions, and inter-relationship of different components with an architectural model such as Open System Interconnection (OSI) seven layer model and TCP/IP model. 2. Describe how components and subsystems in the physical layer, data link layer, and network layer inter-operate and analyze their performance. 3. Evaluate critically the performance of some common computer networks. 4. Design solutions to solve engineering problems that require the applications of computer network technology. 5. Appreciate the principles and operations of various network applications. 6. Take up new knowledge by reading related magazines, journal papers, and trade brochures, and by analyzing new situations while taking into account various constraints. 7. Describe how rapid progress of computer and network technology can impact on the society in various aspects, such as culture and economics.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness 8. Present ideas and findings effectively. 9. Think critically. 10. Learn independently.
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcome 1, 2, 5: This subject contributes to the programme Outcomes outcome through the teaching of the theories and concepts of computer networks and through providing with an opportunity to apply their knowledge. • Programme Outcome 3, 6: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing students with laboratory exercises to understanding of networking and internetworking concepts. • Programme Outcome 4: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing the opportunity for students to solve practical engineering problems pertaining to the fields of computer networks.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness
158
• Programme Outcome 9: This subject contributes to the programme
outcome by providing students with an opportunity to practice communicating effectively. • Programme Outcome 10: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing students with an opportunity to think critically about the most suitable network analysis and debugging techniques for analyzing computer networks.
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Computer Networks, Services, and Layered Architectures Evolution of networking and switching technology. Protocol and services. Layered network architectures: OSI 7-layer model, TCP/IP architecture, digital transmission local area networks.
2. Protocols in Data Link Layer Automatic Repeat Request (ARQ) protocol and reliable data transfer service. Sliding-window flow control. Framing and point-to-point protocol, flow control and error controls.
3. Packet Switching Technology Connectionless (datagram) packet switching and virtual-circuit switching. Routing in packet networks.
4. TCP/IP Protocols IP packet format, addressing, subnetting, and IP routing. TCP protocol: connection management and congestion control. Dynamic Host Configuration, Network Address Translation.
5. Network Applications Sockets, client-server model, Domain Name Systems (DNS), the File Transfer Protocol (FTP), Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP).
6. Case Studies (conducted in tutorial sessions) Recent development in data communications and computer networking; Selected topics: Voice over IP, Virtual Private Network, Internet 2, high speed router design, network security, etc.
Laboratory Experiments:
1. Cisco router configuration and programming 2. Static routing and dynamic routing 3. Protocol analysis 4. Network Address Translation 5. Routing simulation study 6. Terminal server over the Ethernet
Teaching/ Learning Methodology Teaching and Intended Remarks Learning Method Subject Learning Outcome Lectures 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Fundamental principles and key 9 concepts of the subject are delivered to students.
Tutorials 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Supplementary to lectures and 6, 7, 9, 10 are conducted with smaller class size; Students will be able to clarify concepts and to have a deeper understanding of the lecture material; 159
Problems and application examples are given and discussed. Laboratory sessions 8, 9, 10 Students will set up a mini- internet and conduct practical exercises to reinforce concepts and techniques learned.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific % Intended Subject Learning Outcomes Assessment to be Assessed (Please tick as Intended Subject Weighting Learning Outcomes Methods/ Task appropriate) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1. Continuous 40%
Assessment • Short quizzes • Assignments • Tests • Laboratory sessions
2. Examination 60%
Total 100%
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Specific Assessment Remark Methods/Tasks Short quizzes Mainly objective tests conducted to measure the students’ understanding of the theories
and concepts as well as their comprehension of subject materials Assignments, tests and End-of-chapter type problems used to evaluate examination students’ ability in applying concepts and skills learnt in the classroom; Assignments of reading report type to assess students’ ability in acquiring new knowledge related to computer networks;
Students need to think critically and creatively in order to come with an alternate solution for an existing problem.
Laboratory sessions Each group of students is required to produce a written report; Accuracy and the presentation of the report will
be assessed; Oral examination based on the laboratory exercises will be conducted for each group member to evaluate his technical knowledge and communication skills.
160
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 24 Hours
• Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes 18 hours
Other student study effort:
• Lecture: preview/review of notes; 36 Hours homework/assignment; preparation for test/quizzes/examination • Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes: preview of 27 Hours materials, revision and/or reports writing Total student study effort: 105 Hours
Reading List and Textbook: References 1. Alberto Leon-Garcia and Indra Widjaja, Communication Networks: Fundamentals Concepts and Key Architectures, McGraw-Hill, 2004.
Reference Books:
1. Douglas Comer, Computer Networks and Internets: with Internet Applications, 4th ed., Pearson/Prentice-Hall, 2004. 2. William Stallings, Data and Computer Communications, 7th ed., Pearson/Prentice-Hall, 2004. 3. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, Computer Networks, 4th ed., Prentice-Hall, 2003. 4. Mimitri P. Bertsekas, Data Networks, 2nd ed., Prentice-Hall, 1992 (This reference is selected as a classic).
161
Subject Description Form
Subject Code EIE343
Subject Title Computer System Principles
Credit Value 3
Level 3
Pre-requisite Introduction to Logic Design (EIE214) or Logic Design (EIE211)
Co-requisite Nil
Exclusion Computer System Fundamentals (EIE311)
Objectives This subject provides students with a broad treatment of the fundamentals of computer systems. Upon completion of the subject, the students should be able to appreciate the typical design concepts adopted in Intel 80x86 microprocessors, memory organization and cache memory, to understand interfacing techniques for the I/O system and the basic concepts of operating systems, and to develop simple assembly language programs.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. Understand the fundamentals of computer systems. 2. Appreciate basic computer arithmetic algorithms and the design issues of fast addition and multiplication. 3. Understand memory organization and the working principle of cache memory. 4. Appreciate different important computer interfacing techniques. 5. Understand the basic concepts of operating systems. 6. Develop simple assembly programs with an assembler and a debug tool.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness 7. Understand the creative process. 8. Demonstrate self-learning and life-long learning capability.
Contribution of Programme Outcomes: the Subject to the Attainment of Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills the Programme • Programme Outcomes 1 and 2: This subject contributes to the programme Outcomes outcomes through exploring the concepts and design issues of computer systems and through providing the students with an opportunity to apply their knowledge. • Programme Outcome 2: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through teaching interfacing design of memory and I/O systems. • Programme Outcome 4: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through teaching assembly language programming and debugging tools. • Programme Outcomes 2 and 4: This subject contributes to the programme outcomes by providing students with laboratory exercises to simulate cache memory, to analyze DOS file systems, to examine 80x86 registers and memory architecture, and to write and debug simple assembly language programs.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcome 10: This subject contributes to the programme outcome
by providing students with an opportunity to think critically and creatively about the design issues of computer systems and their components. • Programme Outcome 11: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing students with the foundations for life-long learning and continual professional development in the areas of computer architecture and
162 organization.
Subject Syllabus: Synopsis/ Indicative 1. Introduction to Computing Syllabus Data formats Internal organization of computers Inside CPUs Brief history of the CPU
2. Computer Arithmetic Floating-point numbers and operations Fast addition Fast multiplication algorithms
3. The 80x86 Microprocessor Brief history of the 80x86 family Inside the 80x86
4. Assembly Programming Types of instructions Segments in the 80x86 80x86 addressing modes A sample program Assemble, link, and run a program
5. Memory and Memory Interfacing Memory address decoding IBM PC memory map Data integrity in RAM and ROM 16-bit memory interfacing
6. Input/Output and I/O Interfacing Input/output instructions I/O address decoding I/O address map of x86 PCs 8255 PPI chip
7. Interrupts and DMA Basics of interrupts 8088/86 interrupts Direct memory accessing
8. I/O Devices Hard disks Video displays
9. 386 Microprocessor: Real vs. Protected Mode 80386 in real mode 80386: a hardware view 80386 protected mode
10. High-Speed Memory Interfacing and Cache Memory Memory cycle time of the 80x86 Cache memory High-speed memory
11. Introduction to Operating Systems Basic input/output system (BIOS) and basic disk operating system (DOS) File systems Multitasking and time-sharing
Laboratory Experiments:
1. 80x86 registers and memory architecture
163 2. Assembly language programming 3. 8255 PPI chip programming and applications
Teaching/ Learning Teaching and Intended Remarks Methodology Learning Method Subject Learning Outcome Lectures 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Fundamental principles and key concepts of the subject are delivered to students. Tutorials 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Supplementary to lectures and are 7 conducted with smaller class size;
students will be able to clarify concepts and to have a deeper understanding of the lecture material;
problems and application examples are given and discussed. Laboratory sessions 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, students will make use of 7, 8 an x86 assembler and debugger to develop assembly programs and explore basic file systems and OS concepts;
software MATLAB to simulate cache memory; and
circuit boards to study various I/O interfacing techniques and evaluate their efficiency and performance.
Assignments 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Through working assignment and 6 end-of-chapter problems in text
books, students will develop a firm understanding and comprehension of the knowledge taught.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment % Intended Subject Learning Methods/ Task Outcomes to be Assessed Intended Subject Weighting Learning (Please tick as appropriate) Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1. Continuous 40%
Assessment • Laboratory sessions • Assignments • Tests 2. Examination 60% Total 100%
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Specific Assessment Remark Methods/Tasks Assignments, tests and End-of-chapter type problems used to evaluate
164 examination students’ ability in applying concepts and skills learnt in the classroom; Students need to think critically and creatively in order to come with an alternate solution for an existing problem. Laboratory sessions Each student is required to answer several questions related to each lab session in the lab sheet and hand in his/her answers.
Student Study Class contact (time-tabled): Effort Expected • Lecture 24 Hours
• Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes 18 hours
Other student study effort:
• Lecture: preview/review of notes; 36 Hours homework/assignments; preparation for tests/examination • Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes: preview of 27 Hours materials, revision and/or reports writing Total student study effort: 105 Hours
Reading List and Reference Books: References 1. Muhammad A. Mazidi and Janice G. Mazidi, The 80x86 IBM PC and Compatible Computers: Assembly Language, Design, and Interfacing, International Edition, 5th ed., Pearson Education, 2010. rd 2. J. Uffenbeck, The 80x86 Family: Design, Programming, and Interfacing, 3 ed., Prentice-Hall, 2002. th 3. C. Hamacher, Z. Vranesic and S. Zaky, Computer Organization, 5 ed., McGraw-Hill, 2002. 4. W. Stallings, Computer Organization & Architecture: Designing for Performance, 8th ed., Prentice-Hall, 2009. 5. B.B. Bery, The Intel Microprocessors 8086/8088, 80186/80188, 8086, 80386, 80486, Pentium, Pentium pro processor, Pentium II, Pentium III, Pentium 4 and Core2 with 64-bit extensions: Architecture, Programming, and Interfacing, 8th ed., Pearson Prentice-Hall, 2009.
165 Subject Description Form
Subject Code EIE345
Subject Title Data Communication Technologies
Credit Value 3
Level 3
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives To equip students with the fundamentals of data communication systems, and to train students to appreciate the underlying principle of modern communication systems.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. Understand the fundamentals of data communication systems and associated technologies. 2. Solve problems related to data communications. 3. Apply theory to practice by doing laboratory experiments on communication techniques.
Category B: Attribute for all-roundedness 4. Team work and presentation skills will be developed through the case study. 5. Case studies will also allow students to develop a fuller understanding of social and community issues related to the application of communications technologies. 6. To appreciate the importance of creativity and critical thinking, and to realize that there is no perfect communication system for any particular situation and that engineers have to find “optimum” solutions, or make optimum designs.
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcome 1: This subject contributes to the programme Outcomes outcome by providing the opportunity for students to solve practical problems pertaining to the field of communication systems. • Programme Outcome 3: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through the teaching of the theories and concepts of communication systems and through providing the students with an opportunity to apply their knowledge. • Programme Outcome 4: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through teaching the design and requirements of data communication systems.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcome 10: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing the students with an opportunity to think critically about the design and analysis of telecommunication systems.
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction A communication model. Digital data communications and networks.
2. Data Transmission and Channel Review of time and frequency domain representations, Fourier Series,
166 Fourier transform. Analogue and digital data transmission. Data rate and required bandwidth. Channel impairments. Characterisation and attenuation of transmission media, twisted pair, cable, optical fibre, free space.
3. Information Theory and Source Coding Measure of Information and entropy. Channel capacity. Source coding theorem. Source coding algorithms: Huffman coding, Shannon-Fano coding.
4. Data Encoding Sampling and aliasing. Pulse-code modulation, uniform and non-uniform quantization. Line coding: RZ, NRZ, AMI. Digital modulation: ASK, FSK, PSK, QAM.
5. Data Link Control Propagation delay, effective throughput. Sliding window protocol. Flow and Error Control, stop-and-wait ARQ, Go-back-N ARQ.
6. Error Detection and Correction Coding and decoding of linear block codes, cyclic codes and convolutional codes.
7. Data Communication Interface. Multiplexing and Switching Asynchronous and synchronous transmission. Line configurations, simplex, duplex and half-duplex. Clock synchronization. Frequency division multiplexing. Time division multiplexing. Code division multiplexing. Multiplexing hierarchies, T1, E1, T2 and T3 carrier systems. SONET and SDH transmission systems. Overview of Circuit and Packet Switching.
8. Current Applications Fixed telephone network. Private automated branch exchange. ADSL, discrete multitone, xDSL. Cable modem. Hybrid fibre coax. Other selected applications examples such as mobile cellular network, wireless LAN, satellite networks, global position system.
Laboratory Experiment:
1. Construction and testing of a simple A-to-D converter 2. Simulation of digital line coding and estimation of BER using MATLAB
Case Study:
1. A detailed study of one of the current applications of telecommunication technologies addressed in this course (for example, section 8 of the Syllabus).
Teaching/ Learning Methodology Teaching and Intended Remarks Learning Method Subject Learning Outcome Lectures 1, 2, 6 fundamental principles and key concepts of the subject are delivered to students
Tutorials 1, 2, 6 supplementary to lectures and are conducted with smaller class size; students will be able to clarify concepts and to have a deeper understanding of the lecture material;
problems and application examples are given and discussed
167 Laboratory 3 students will make use of the software sessions MATLAB to simulate various types of communication systems and evaluate their performance Mini-project 3 students in groups of 3-4 are required to build a prototype of a modem
Case study 4, 5 students will form groups of 3-4. Each group is required to perform a detailed study on one of the current applications of telecommunication technologies
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment % Intended Subject Methods/ Task Learning Outcomes to Intended Subject Weighting Learning Outcomes be Assessed (Please tick as appropriate) 1 2 3 4 5 6 1. Continuous Assessment
(total 40%) • Short quizzes 4% • Assignments 4% • Tests 16% • Laboratory sessions, mini- 10% project
• Case study 6%
2. Examination 60%
Total 100%
The continuous assessment consists of a number of short quizzes, assignments, the case study, laboratory reports and two tests.
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in
assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Specific Assessment Remark Methods/Tasks Short quizzes mainly objective tests (e.g., multiple-choice questions, true-false, and matching items)
conducted to measure the students’ ability to remember facts and figures as well as their comprehension of subject materials
Assignments, tests end-of chapter type problems used to evaluate and examination students’ ability in applying concepts and skills learnt in the classroom; students need to think critically and creatively in order to come with an alternate solution for an existing problem Laboratory sessions, each group of students are required to produce a mini-project written report;
accuracy and the presentation of the report will
be assessed;
oral examination based on the laboratory exercises will be conducted for each group
168 member to evaluate his technical knowledge and
communication skills Case study each group of students will produce a written report and make a presentation of 20 minutes in front of the whole class; students will be assessed based on the content/organization of the report/presentation as well as their communication skills
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 24 Hours
• Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes 18 hours
Other student study effort:
• Lecture: preview/review of notes; 36 Hours homework/assignment; preparation for test/quizzes/examination • Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes: preview of 27 Hours materials, revision and/or reports writing Total student study effort: 105 Hours
Reading List and Textbook: References 1. W. Stallings, Data and computer communications, 8th ed., Prentice-Hall, 2007.
Reference Books:
1. L. Leon-Garcia and I. Widjaja, Communication Networks, McGraw-Hill, 2000. 2. B. Forouzan, Data Communications and Networking, McGraw-Hill, 2002.
169 Subject Description Form
Subject Code EIE360
Subject Title Integrated Project
Credit Value 3
Level 3
Pre-requisite Computer Programming (ENG236) Computer System Principles (EIE343)
Co-requisite/ Nil Exclusion
Objectives At a mid-stage of the programme, this subject plays the role of applying knowledge acquired in other subjects in an integrated manner. While the emphasis will be placed on the technical challenges that may encompass system integration, software development and troubleshooting, students will also be given opportunities to face various non-technical difficulties behind the development of multimedia/information systems.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. Design effective and reliable software programs to achieve the objectives of a project. 2. Critically evaluate the different alternatives and strategies when implementing a project. 3. Locate and resolve problems in a multimedia/information system and the related software.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness 4. Search, self-learn and try untaught solutions. 5. Effectively use the limited resource and exercise discipline and time- planning to meet deadlines. 6. Present ideas and findings effectively. 7. Work in a team and collaborate effectively with others.
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme Programme Outcome 1: This subject contributes to the programme Outcomes outcome by teaching students the features of different multimedia/information systems. Programme Outcome 2: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing students with an opportunity to design and implement digital systems to achieve the objectives of a project. Programme Outcome 3: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through the development process of a multimedia/information system. Programme Outcome 4: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through the development process of software programs used in a multimedia/information system. Programme Outcome 7: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing students with an opportunity to design and implement basic components of computer games, or related applications, etc.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness Programme Outcome 9: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing students with an opportunity to present their ideas
170 in the forms of oral presentation and formal project reports. Programme Outcome 10: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing students with an opportunity to understand the creative process. Programme Outcome 11: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing students with the foundations for life-long learning and continual professional development in the area of multimedia/information system development. Programme Outcome 12: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing the students with an opportunity to practice working in a team.
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus / Operation: Indicative Syllabus The project(s) is of software development in nature with defined milestones (or Subtasks). The scope to be covered will include multimedia and network system design, but does not exclude the possibilities of extending into areas such as computer animation or image processing. The project will not be close- ended in nature and will provide ample headroom for the more enthusiastic students to excel. Students will work in groups of two or three. Each Subtask will be given a certain period of time to complete. Progress will be measured by functional Demonstrations, and one or two written Progress Reports. Upon the completion of the project, each group will give a demonstration/presentation of the completed system and submit a Final Report. Students are required to individually keep a Logbook on the work performed during the entire period. The logbooks are to be evaluated and signed by the supervisor /assessor on a monthly or more frequent basis. At the end of the project, the logbooks will be collected and graded.
Lectures:
Lectures are to be conducted at the beginning of the semester. During these lectures, the instructor shall give clear explanation on the functional and technical requirements, with a schedule for submitting deliverables. Concepts specific to the project(s), which are not yet learnt by the students, are to be covered in these lectures. Concepts behind critical use of tools and equipment will also be strengthened. Copies of supplementary/reference material will be distributed, or, links to on-line material will be provided for self-paced learning.
Guided Laboratory Experiments:
The project will normally require the students to learn to use specific tools and/or equipment. Laboratory demonstrations and exercises will be arranged in the early weeks. Below are some examples: 1. Use of project-specific development tools, software and hardware. 2. Implementation of the basic framework of the project. 3. Software techniques to optimize the performance of the system.
Self-Paced Work:
Multiple sessions of laboratory will be scheduled to cater for self-paced work in the laboratory, particularly during the second half of the semester. To ensure the students are working in a correct direction, defined milestones are given in the course of their work. Students are required to demonstrate their works at each milestone to show their progress.
171
Teaching/ Learning Methodology Teaching and Intended Remarks Learning Method Subject Learning Outcome Lectures 1, 2, 3, 5, 7 Principles and key concepts of the multimedia platform used in the project are explained to students. Uses of tools are demonstrated. The correct attitude to handle a project is also discussed. The goals are specified. The various problems to be encountered are explained. Supervised Laboratory 1, 2, 3, 6, 7 Students will work in teams of sessions two or three to construct a multimedia/information system. They need to learn to use the provided software modules and expand them to accommodate new functionalities. They also need to present the results to the instructors at the end of the lab sessions. Extended self-paced 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Same as above. laboratory work 6, 7
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment % Intended Subject Learning Methods/ Task Outcomes to be Assessed Intended Subject Weighting Learning Outcomes (Please tick as appropriate) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Continuous assessment 100%
Lab reports
Logbook & Reports
Progress and final demonstrations
Total 100%
Assessment on individual student’s ability and contribution will be conducted, according to the attributes detailed below.
INSIGHT as evidenced by how well the concepts are understood CREATIVITY as evidenced by ingenuity and imagination WORKMANSHIP as evidenced by how well ideas are implemented and how problems are resolved DRIVE as evidenced by initiative, diligence and tenacity COMMUNICATION as evidenced by an ability to express ideas clearly and succinctly MANAGEMENT as evidenced by how time, manpower and other resources are effectively used
At the completion of each subtask, team members will be asked to give a
demonstration to the assessor. Based on the presentation and response to questions addressed to the members, the assessor will rate the contribution, achievement, and performance of each member. Other assessment items include lab reports, logbook, progress report, final demonstration, report and presentation.
172
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Specific Assessment Remark Methods/Tasks Lab reports To measure the students’ understanding of the theories and concepts as well as some
practical issues in their subject materials Progress and Final Students need to think critically and creatively Demonstrations in order to come up with good alternate solution for an existing problem. Oral examination on the approach taken will be conducted for each group member to evaluate his contribution, technical knowledge and communication skills. Logbook & Reports Each group of students is required to produce one or two progress reports and a final report. Accuracy and the presentation of the reports will be assessed. Each group needs to explain in the reports the solutions they plan to use or have been used in the project. The reason behind of choosing such solutions should also be exemplified. The students also need to explain how the limited resources are used in the project and how the team members work together to achieve the project goal. Logbooks are assessed to evaluate contributions and the quality of records on the progress.
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected Lecture 12 Hours
Laboratory 12 Hours
Mini-project Work / presentation 18 Hours
Other student study effort:
Self study on teaching material 12 Hours
Laboratory work after scheduled lab sessions 12 Hours
Mini-project Work / presentation / report writing 40 Hours
Total student study effort: 106 Hours
Reading List and Reference Books: References To be specified by the subject lecturer for each project.
173 Subject Description Form
Subject Code EIE3109
Subject Title Mobile Systems and Application Development
Credit Value 3
Level 3
Pre-requisite / Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives This course aims at providing students with an understanding of the real-time embedded computing systems and the techniques essential to the design and implementation of real-time embedded computing applications.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. Understand the structure of real-time operating systems for modern mobile computer systems. 2. Understand the programming techniques and tools for developing software that is run in modern mobile computer systems 3. Apply the knowledge to develop practical applications for modern real-time mobile computer systems.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness 4. understand the creative process when designing solutions to a problem
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcome 3, 5: This subject contributes to these programme Outcomes outcomes through the teaching of the concepts of mobile operating systems and the opportunities to develop mobile applications using modern IT tools.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcome 10: This subject provides the chance for students to exercise creativity in designing solutions to problems.
Subject Synopsis/ 1. Introduction Indicative Syllabus Embedded software – real-time vs non real-time. Introduction to real-time systems and embedded real-time systems. Discussion of popular OS like Unix, Linux and Windows and their real-time extensions. Comparison of embedded OS (Embedded Linux, Windows Mobile, iOS, Android, etc.)
2. System architecture of a basic real-time operating system Internals of Linux OS, RT Linux. Scheduling – RTOS kernel scheduler. Inter task communication and synchronization. Interprocess communication. Considerations for real-time programming.
3. Embedded and real-time software development process Software modeling. Assembling, linking, compiling and locators. Development tools – Emulator, simulator
4. Software development in embedded systems Tasks and semaphores for concurrent programming. Memory management. Coding strategies for optimized time and space requirements. Hardware- software integration. Debugging techniques.
5. Case studies
174 Development of real-time embedded computing applications under e.g. embedded Linux and iPhone environments.
Teaching/Learning Lectures: The subject matters will be delivered through lectures. Students will be Methodology engaged in the lectures through Q&A, discussions and specially designed classroom activities.
Tutorials: During tutorials, students will work on/discuss some chosen topics in small group. This will help strengthen the knowledge taught in lectures.
Laboratory and assignments: During laboratory exercises, students will perform hands-on tasks to practice what they have learned. They will evaluate performance of systems and design solutions to problems. The assignments will help students to review the knowledge taught in class. While lectures and tutorials will help to achieve the professional outcomes, the open-ended questions in laboratory exercises and assignments will provide the chance to students to exercise their creatively in problem solving.
Assessment Methods in Specific Assessment % Intended Subject Learning Alignment with Methods/Tasks Weighting Outcomes to be Assessed (Please Intended Subject tick as appropriate) Learning Outcomes 1 2 3 4
1. Continuous Assessment (total: 50%)
• Homework and 15% assignments
• Tests 20%
• Laboratory 15% exercises
2. Examination 5%
Total 100%
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Assignment, homework and laboratory exercises will require students to apply what they have learnt to solve problems. There will be open-ended questions that allow students to exercise their creativity in making design.
Examination and tests: They assess students’ achievement of the learning outcomes in a more formal manner.
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 24 Hours
• Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes 18 hours
Other student study effort:
• Lecture: preview/review of notes; homework/assignment; 36 Hours preparation for test/quizzes/examination • Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes: preview of materials, 27 Hours
175 revision and/or reports writing
Total student study effort: 105 Hours
Reading List and Text Book: References 1. Raj Kamal, Embedded Systems Architecture Programming and Design, 1st ed., McGraw-Hill, 2008.
Reference Book:
1. P.J. Deitel, iPhone for programmers: an app-driven approach, Prentice-Hall, 2010. 2. R. Williams, Real-time systems development, Oxford: Elsevier Butterworth- Heinemann, 2006.
176 Subject Description Form
Subject Code ELC3508
Subject Title English for Effective Workplace Communication
Credit Value 2
Level 3
Pre-requisite ELC2501 University I and ELC2502 University English II
Co-requisite/ Nil Exclusion
Objectives This subject aims to develop the English language skills required by students to communicate effectively in their future professional careers.
Intended Subject By the end of the subject, students should be able to communicate Learning Outcomes effectively in workplace contexts through:
1. interacting professionally in a job interview; 2. writing appropriate correspondence related to engineering professions; and 3. writing logical and coherent reports.
To achieve the above outcomes, students are expected to use language and text structure appropriate to the context, select information critically, present ideas systematically and logically, and provide support for stance and opinion.
Subject Synopsis/ This content is indicative. The balance of the components, and the Indicative Syllabus corresponding weighting, will be based on the specific needs of the students.
1. Job interviews and work-related discussions Practising the specific verbal and non-verbal skills required when communicating with potential employers in job-seeking interviews.
2. Workplace correspondence Selecting and using relevant content; organising ideas and information; maintaining appropriate tone, distance and level of formality; achieving coherence and cohesion; adopting an appropriate style, format, structure and layout.
3. Workplace reports Selecting and using relevant content; organising ideas and information; describing tables and graphs; discussing and analysing data; adopting an appropriate style, format, structure and layout.
4. Language appropriacy Using context-sensitive language in spoken and written English. 5. Language development Improving and extending relevant features of grammar, vocabulary and pronunciation.
Teaching/Learning The subject is designed to introduce students to the communication skills, Methodology both oral and written, that they may need to function effectively in their future professions.
The study method is primarily seminar-based. Activities include teacher input as well as individual and group work involving drafting and evaluating texts, mini-presentations, discussions and simulations. Students will be referred to
177 information on the Internet and the ELC’s Centre for Independent Language Learning.
Learning materials developed by the English Language Centre are used throughout this course. Additional reference materials will be recommended as required.
Assessment Methods in Alignment with Specific Assessment % Intended Subject Learning Intended Learning Methods/Tasks Weighting Outcomes to be Assessed Outcomes (Please tick as appropriate) 1 2 3
Continuous Assessment • Job interview 40% • Email and report writing 60%
Total 100%
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Students’ oral and writing skills are evaluated through assessment tasks related to the learning outcomes. Students are assessed on the accuracy and the appropriacy of the language used in fulfilling the assessment tasks, as well as the selection and organisation of ideas.
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Seminars 28 Hours
Other student study effort:
• Classwork-related and project-related preparation 56 Hours and self-access work
Total student study effort: 84 Hours
Reading List and Coursebook: References 1. English Language Centre. (2009). ELC 3508 English for Effective Workplace Communication. Hong Kong: The Hong Kong Polytechnic University.
Recommended Readings:
1. J. E. Appleman, 10 steps to successful business writing. Alexandria, VA.: ASTD, 2008. 2. A. Ashley, A handbook of commercial correspondence, 2nd ed., Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1992. 3. T. Aspinall and G. Bethell, Test your business vocabulary in use, 1st ed., Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003. 4. G. T. Bilbow, Business writing for Hong Kong, 3rd ed., Hong Kong: Longman, 2004. 5. M. E. Guffey, Essentials of business communication, 8th ed., Mason, OH: South-Western College Publication, 2010. 6. C. R. Krannich and R. L. Krannich, Interview for success: A practical guide to increasing job interviews, offers, and salaries. Manassas Park, VA: Impact Publications, 2003. 7. J. Potter, Common business English errors in Hong Kong. Hong Kong: Longman, 1992.
178 8. A. White, Interview styles and strategies. Mason, OH: South-Western College Publication/Thomson Learning, 2003.
179 Subject Description Form
Subject Code SD348
Subject Title Introduction to Industrial Design
Credit Value 3
Level 3
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives This subject gives an introduction to the field of industrial design as a creative discipline, a discipline which synthesises knowledge from fields as diverse as e.g. the Arts, the Sciences and Engineering. Industrial Design is known for its capacity to innovate and to add value to products and services. Industrial designers solve problems centred on user needs with the intent to improve the quality of people’s lives. The design process incorporates unique problem solving methods and creativity process. Industrial design intends to work with technological and ecological parameters in an appropriate way. The development and use of state of the art tools and technologies puts industrial design in a significant position socially and economically.
The subject aims to equip students with enough knowledge and experience of industrial design to appreciate the profession, relate to its practitioners in different work situations, employ the design process appropriately for problem solving and innovation, and to realise the importance of a user centred approach to the creation of new products and services.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes 1. Appreciate the industrial/product design profession, relate to its practitioners in different work situations. 2. Employ the design process appropriately for problem solving and innovation. 3. Realise the importance of a user centred approach to the creation of new products and services. 4. Apply visualisation skill in project presentation. 5. Understand objectives of industrial/product design, and apply knowledge and experience in other related subjects and future career.
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcome 6: Appreciate and identify factors/issues related to Outcomes product/industrial design
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcome 9: Communicate effectively, and present ideas and findings clearly in oral and written forms • Programme Outcome 10: Understand the creative process • Programme Outcome 12: Collaborate effectively with other members in a team, and demonstrate leadership capability • Programme Outcome 13: Recognize social responsibility and ethics
Subject Synopsis/ The field of industrial design is introduced through a series of lectures Indicative Syllabus featuring a review of milestones of design achievements internationally and locally. The relationships between design, culture and society are highlighted through a look at topics like cultural identity in product design, user centred design, employment of technologies, and design and sustainability.
Further lectures and seminars cover two major parts of industrial design and 180 its professional practice:
1. The essentially theoretical foundation of the industrial design process and methodology covering topics such as: Design and culture Form, aesthetics and semantics Human factors and ergonomics in design Research and problem identification Design requirements and design brief Design development and specifications Design evaluation and concept selection
2. The essentially practical aspects of the industrial design process covering topics such as: Design visualisation, presentation and communication Product prototyping and user testing Manufacturer and marketing relations
Teaching/ Learning Emphasis in the practical exercises is placed on student’s creativity in relation Methodology to designing. Students explore different approaches to problems and experience methods of problem solving with the designer’s tools.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment % Intended Subject Learning Methods/ Task Outcomes to be Assessed Intended Subject Weighting Learning Outcomes (Please tick as appropriate) 1 2 3 4 5
1. Design project: 10% Understanding design process 2. Design project: 30% investigation and application in design 3. Design project: 45%
development of design ideas
4. Design project: 15% presentation of design ideas Total 100%
Project and continuous assessment approaches are adopted in the subject.
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lectures and seminars 28 Hours
• Tutorials and exercises 14 Hours
Other student study effort:
• Research and design 28 Hours
• Preparation of presentation 10 Hours
Total student study effort: 80 Hours
Reading List and Indicative References: References 1. Design Issues. The MIT Press. (Journal) 2. Design Management Journal. The Design Management Institute. (Journal) 3. Design Studies. Elsevier Science. (Journal) 4. International Journal of Design (Journal)
181 5. A. Fung, A. Lo and M.N. Rao, Creative tools. Hong Kong: School of Design, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University, 2005. 6. T.E. Graedel, Industrial Ecology, 2nd ed., Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 2003. 7. P.W. Jordan, Putting the Pleasure into Products, IEE Review, 249-252, November 1997. 8. J.Y.C. Kwok (Ed.), (Re)-Discovering Design: A Critical Consideration of the Hong Kong Culture of Design, Hong Kong: A Better Tomorrow Workshop, 1997. 9. T.P. Leung (Ed.), Hong Kong: Better by design. Hong Kong: The Hong Kong Polytechnic University, 2004. 10. D. Mackenzie, Green Design: Design for the Environment, 2nd ed., London: Laurence King, 1997. 11. D.A. Norman, The Invisible Computer: Why Good Products can Fail, the Personal Computer is so Complex and Information Appliances are the Solution, Cambridge, Mass., London: The MIT Press, 1998. 12. D.A. Norman, The Design of Everyday Things, London: The MIT Press, 1998. 13. H. Roqueta, Product Design, London: Te Neues, 2002. 14. P.G. Rowe, Design thinking, Cambridge, Mass.: The MIT Press, 1987. 15. K.W.M. Siu (Ed.), New era of product design: Theory and practice (Chinese ed.) Beijing: Beijing Institute of Technology Press, 2009. 邵健偉 編著：《產品設計新紀元：理論與實踐》。北京：北京理工大學出版社 2009。 16. N. Stanton (Ed.), Human Factors in Consumer Products, London: Taylor & Francis, 1998. 17. K.T. Ulrich, Product Design and Development, 3rd ed., New York, NY: McGraw-Hill/Irwin, 2004. 18. S.Z. Wang, A history of modern design 1864-1996, Guangzhou: Xin Shi Ji Chu Ban She, 1995. 19. N. Whiteley, Design for Society, London: Reaktion Books, 1993.
182 Subject Description Form
Subject Code SD3983
Subject Title Computer Game Development II
Credit Value 3
Level 3
Pre-requisite Computer Graphics (COMP407) and Computer Game Development I (SD3982) or Computer Game Development I (SD3984)
Co-requisite/ Nil Exclusion
Objectives 1. To introduce students with fundamental concepts and algorithms in developing 3D computer game. 2. To provide students with hands-on experience in designing and developing 3D computer game.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. Identify essential building blocks in 3D computer games 2. Understand, analyze, implement and evaluate algorithms in developing 3D computer games 3. Realize trends in real-time algorithms in advanced 3D computer games 4. Explore new algorithms for future 3D computer games 5. Demonstrate understanding of game production process through developing a 3D computer game in a team starting from ideas
Attitudes of all-roundedness 6. Collaborate, organize and communicate with others in effective team work 7. Realize the interdisciplinary nature in 3D computer games development and appreciate importance of collaboration 8. Be creative and critical to game and play design
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction Game production pipeline, 3D game engine and components.
2. Graphics and Rendering Graphics rendering pipeline; 3D hardware: programmable graphics pipeline, shading languages, procedural shading, lighting, effects; scene management; visibility processing, resource management; 3D modelling, skeleton, texturing and materials, animation.
3. Audio 3D and multi-channel audio; modelling for effects, echo.
4. Physics Physics basic concepts; kinematics, kinetics, dynamics; Newton’s laws, mass, moment of inertia, friction, force; constrained motion; particle systems.
5. Artificial intelligence Path planning; agent architecture; decision-making systems; genre- specific AI (FPS, RTS, RPG, racing and sport AI), behavioural modelling, artificial life.
6. Network
183 Multiplayer game architecture, networking, protocols, topologies, security, database; online game systems.
Laboratory Experiment: 3D modelling software (3D Studio Max).
Teaching/ Learning • Lectures which introduce basic technical components in 3D game Methodology programming, including architecture of 3D game engine, and algorithms and trends in their future developments. Students are required to study a new algorithm and study its implications in 3D game design and development. • Students are required to complete a number of tasks corresponding to those essential technical components in laboratory sessions, which serve as basis for students to realize their 3D games in their mini-project. • Students form a group to work on a mini-project to design and realize a playable game from ideas to demonstrate their understanding in the entire game production process.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment % Intended Subject Learning Methods/ Task Outcomes to be Assessed Intended Subject Weighting Learning Outcomes (Please tick as appropriate) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Continuous Assessment • Written Assignment 10%
• Laboratory 30% • Mini-project 60%
Total 100%
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Written assignment is given to students for them to study new algorithms in 3D computer game and understand their implications in 3D game design and development.
Laboratories are organized to let students to learn and practice basic technical components in a 3D game engine for realizing a 3D game. Each student is required to complete a predefined task according to a lab sheet for each laboratory session. They are also required to explore.
Students form groups of at most three members to work on a mini-project, in which each group creates a game starting from ideas till a playable game. During the project period, each group is required to submit assignments corresponding to different stage of the game development process. At the end of the project, each group is required to demonstrate their game and present their whole project to the class.
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture/Tutorial 24 Hours
• Laboratory 21 Hours
Other student study effort:
• Mini-project 30 Hours
• Assignment 6 Hours
Total student study effort: 81 Hours
184 Reading List and Reference Books: References 1. T. Moller, Real-Time Rendering, A.K. Peters, 1999. 2. J.D. Foley, Computer Graphics: Principles and Practice, 1996. 3. A. Watt, 3D Games: Real-time Rendering and Software Technology, Addison-Wesley, 2001. 4. R. Parent, Computer Animation: Algorithms and Techniques, Morgan Kaufmann, 2001. 5. D.M. Bourg, Physics for Game Developers, O’Reilly, 2002. 6. A.A. Shabana, Computational Dynamics, Wiley, 2001. 7. P.H. Winston, Artificial Intelligence, Addison-Wesley, 1992. 8. S. Rabin, AI Game Programming Wisdom, Charles River Media, 2002. 9. S. Rabin, AI Game Programming Wisdom 2, Charles River Media, 2002. 10. T. Barron, Multiplayer Game Programming, Prime Tech, 2001. 11. A. Mulholland, Developer’s Guide to Multiplayer Game, WordWare Publishing Inc, 2002. 12. G. Junker, Pro Ogre 3D Programming, APress, 2006. 13. R. Fernando and M.J. Kilgard, The Cg Tutorial, Addison-Wesley, 2003 14. S. Zerbst, 3D Game Engine Programming, Thomson Course Technology, 2004 15. A. Watt and F. Policarpo, 3D Games: Real-Time Rendering and Software Technology, v1, Addison-Wesley, 2001
185 Subject Description Form
Subject Code SD3984
Subject Title Computer Game Development I
Credit Value 3
Level 3
Pre-requisite Computer Programming (ENG236)
Co-requisite/ Nil Exclusion
Objectives 1. To provide a broad overview of fundamental elements and concepts in computer games design and development, and in their production process 2. To provide students with hands-on experience in designing and developing a computer game
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. Design, analyze, implement and evaluate computer games 2. Appreciate computer games’ designs and complexities 3. Demonstrate understanding of game production process through developing a computer game in a team starting from ideas 4. Demonstrate understanding of technical components in realizing a 2D game
Category B: Attitudes of all-roundedness 5. Collaborate, organize and communicate with others in effective team work 6. Realize the interdisciplinary nature in computer games development and appreciate importance of collaboration 7. Be creative and critical to game and play design
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Game Design Overview History of computer games, types of computer games (video, console, arcade, hand-held, wireless, mobile); game genres; play mechanics; game rules; game balancing: obstacle/aid, penalties/rewards; board game, role- playing game; interface design, information design, human-computer interaction design; integration of visual , audio, tactile and textual elements; visual design: composition, lighting and colour, graphics design; Audio design: music, sound effects; storytelling; game theory
2. Media and Tools Game arts; tools and standards of media: image and audio
3. Game Production Process Evaluating game concepts; game design documentation, storyboard, playtest; content creation, team roles, group dynamics, risk assessment; software engineering, project management; prototyping, iterative development; pre-production, production, testing
4. Game Programming Game loop; game engine architecture; event processing; SDL; physics and collision detection; networking
186 Teaching/ Learning This subject will engage students by: Methodology • Lectures which introduce students with basic concepts in game design and essential elements in a game design document. Assignments are given to students for them to analyze essential elements in a simple game and write a game design document to describe the game. • Lectures which introduce basic technical components in 2D game programming, and laboratory sessions for them to implement these technical components in 2D game programming. Students are required to complete a number of tasks corresponding to these essential technical components in each lab, which serve as basis for students to realize their 2D games in their mini-project. • Students form a group to work on a mini-project to design and realize a playable game from ideas to demonstrate their understanding in the entire game production process.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment % Intended Subject Learning Methods/ Task Outcomes to be Assessed (Please Intended Subject Weighting Learning Outcomes tick as appropriate) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Continuous Assessment • Written 10% assignment • Laboratory 35% • Mini-project 55% Total 100%
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Written assignments are given to students for them to analyze essential elements of a computer game and to understand format of a game design document.
Laboratories are organized to let students to learn and practice basic technical components in realizing a 2D game. Each student is required to complete a predefined task according to a lab sheet for each laboratory session.
Students form groups of at most three members to work on a mini-project, in which each group creates a game starting from ideas till a playable game. During the project period, each group is required to submit assignments corresponding to different stage of the game development process. At the end of the project, each group is required to demonstrate their game and present their whole project to the class.
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture/Tutorial 24 Hours
• Laboratory 21 Hours
Other student study effort:
• Mini-project 30 Hours
• Assignment 6 Hours
Total student study effort: 81 Hours
187 Reading List and Reference books: References 1. K. Salen and E. Zimmerman, Rules of Play: Game Design Fundamental, 2004. 2. K. Oxland, Gameplay and Design, Addison Wesley, 2004. 3. C. Crawford, The Art of Computer Game Design, 1982. Available on line at URL: http://www.vancouver.wsu.edu/fac/peabody/game-book/Coverpage.html. 4. F.D. Laramee, Game Design Perspectives, Charles River Media, 2002. 5. D. Saffer, Designing for Interaction: Creating Smart Applications and Clear Devices, News Riders, 2005. 6. J.S. Lewinski, Developer’s guide to Computer Game Design, WordWare Publishing Inc, 2000. 7. A. Rollings and D. Morris, Game Architecture and Design, New Riders Publishing, 2003. 8. H. Chandler, The Game Production Handbook, Charles River Media, 2006. 9. E. Bethke, Game Development and Production, WordWare Publishing Inc, 2003. 10. D. Michael, The Indie Game Development Survival Guide, Charles River Media, 2003. 11. E. Pazera, Focus on SDL, Premier Press, 2003. 12. IGDA (www.igda.org). 13. SDL (www.libsdl.org).
188 Subject Description Form
Subject Code COMP407
Subject Title Computer Graphics
Credit Value 3
Level 4
Pre-requisite Computer Programming (ENG236)
Co-requisite/ Nil Exclusion
Objectives This subject allows students to:
1. learn basic and fundamental computer graphics techniques; 2. learn image synthesis techniques; 3. examine applications of modelling, design and visualization.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. gain proficiency in 3D computer graphics API programming; 2. understand the interactive computer graphics architecture; 3. possess in-depth knowledge of display systems, image synthesis, shape modeling, and interactive control of 3D computer graphics applications; 4. enhance their perspective of modern computer system with modeling, analysis and interpretation of 2D and 3D visual information.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness 5. understand, appreciate and follow the development and advancement of computer graphics technologies, including advanced technologies for 3D modelling, high performance rendering.
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcomes 1, 2: This subject contributes to the programme Outcomes outcomes through the teaching of the related concepts for graphics and multimedia, providing the students with an opportunity to apply their knowledge in programming exercises and laboratories. • Programme Outcomes 4 and 10: This subject contributes to the programme outcomes through graphics project development with careful design and implementation.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcomes 4 and 10: This subject contributes to the programme outcomes through graphics project development with careful design and implementation. • Programme Outcomes 9 and 12: This subject contributes to the programme outcomes with group project development and associated report writing.
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Basic Computer Graphics Hardware/Software Interfaces (15 hours) Graphical input/output devices; 2D primitive drawing; rasterization; 2D transformation; 3D transformation and projection; synthetic camera and viewing volume; clipping; object modeling and hierarchical structures.
2. Image Synthesis and Generation Techniques (12 hours)
189 Some of the important image generation techniques including hardware- based rendering, scan-conversion, local illumination models, reflections and shading; related issues such as anti-aliasing and texture mapping.
3. Applications of Computer Graphics (15 hours) Introduction to OpenGL and device independent Application Programming Interfaces (API); virtual reality; hardware supported 3D modeling and rendering.
Laboratory Experiment:
Laboratory exercises will normally be conducted using the currently available computer graphics API such as OpenGL. The students will be exposed to basic frame-buffer control, pixel processes, rasterization, 2D drawings, 3D transformations, projections, scene hierarchy, modeling objects, color and interactive animation.
Case Study:
If applicable, case studies may be conducted on modeling and design systems that are used in commercial applications.
Teaching/ Learning The learning methodology will be based on: Methodology 1. Lecture notes 2. Laboratory notes and programming exercises 3. Textbook material 4. Additional reference material 5. Web links to active tutorials and other presentation material
Group interactions and supervised discussion sessions.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific % Intended Subject Learning Intended Subject Assessment Weighting Outcomes to be Assessed (Please Learning Outcomes Methods/Tasks tick as appropriate) 1 2 3 4 5
1. Assignments / 30% Lab exercises 2. Mid-term 30%
3. Examination 40%
Total 100%
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
The assignment weights will be effectively distributed amongst the intended subject learning outcomes to nurture creative thinking, independence, teamwork, technical skills and a global perspective towards the technological base of this subject. Specifically, the assignments and the lab exercises are selected to develop the technical skills and knowledge to solve problems in computing and software development as well as to realize effective solutions, understand, evaluate and develop a critical perspective in the development of both small and large systems and integration of systems. Critical thinking, effective communication and a demonstrable global outlook will be incorporated at every level of exercises and mid-term examinations. The final examination accounts for a global and comprehensive understanding of the entire subject material and serves as the final checkpoint for the learning outcomes against technical skills and critical problem solving with respect to all components of computer graphics and 3D modeling.
190 Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 42 Hours
• Laboratory 7 Hours
Other student study effort:
• Class participation 4 Hours
• Course work: reading, discussion, assignments 42 Hours
Total student study effort: 95 Hours
Reading List and Textbook: References 1. D. Hearn and M. Baker, Computer Graphics with OpenGL, 2nd ed., Prentice-Hall, 2004.
Reference Books:
1. D. Eck, Fundamentals of Computer Graphics with Java and OpenGL, http://math.hws.edu/graphicsnotes, 2010. 2. P. Shirley and S. Marschner, Fundamentals of Computer Graphics, 3rd ed., A.K. Peters, 2009. 3. E.S. Angel, Interactive Computer Graphics, A top-down approach with OpenGL, 2nd ed., Addison-Wesley, 2000. 4. E.S. Angel, OpenGL: A Primer, Addison-Wesley, 2000. 5. A. Watt, 3D Computer Graphics, 3rd ed., Addison-Wesley, 2000. 6. F.S. Jr. Hill, Computer Graphics Using Open GL, 2nd ed., Prentice-Hall, 2001.
191 Subject Description Form
Subject Code COMP436
Subject Title Middleware and Distributed Objects
Credit Value 3
Level 4
Pre-requisite Principles of Programming (COMP201) or Object-Oriented Design and Programming (EIE320)
Co-requisite Nil
Exclusion Internet System Integration (COMP403)
Objectives 1. To present an integrated view of the basic building blocks of a distributed system and how middleware can help developers to more easily satisfy the requirements of building distributed systems. 2. To provide the foundation knowledge of middleware, particularly object- oriented middleware. 3. To provide training in using CORBA as middleware to build practical distributed systems.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. understand the basic structure of distributed systems; 2. understand the motivation of using middleware; 3. understand the basic theories underlying the design of middleware; 4. learn to make judgment in choosing a suitable middleware for application problems; 5. understand the basic concepts of CORBA; 6. develop distributed object-based systems using CORBA.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness 7. apply the technical knowledge learned to solve real-life practical problems; 8. appreciate and evaluate existing and new technologies.
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcomes 1, 2: This subject contributes to the programme Outcomes outcomes through the teaching of the related concepts of systems connected by network in a distributed environment, assessing their knowledge with programming assignments and examination. • Programme Outcomes 3 and 4: This subject contributes to the programme outcomes through programming assignments with careful design and implementation.
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Principles of object-oriented middleware (3 hours) Role of middleware in distributed systems; types of middleware; object- oriented middleware; local versus distributed objects; developing systems with object-oriented middleware.
2. Fundamentals of CORBA (9 hours) Architecture; Interface definition language (IDL); system development using CORBA.
3. Communication paradigms of CORBA (6 hours) Synchronous requests; oneway requests; deferred synchronous requests; 192 asynchronous requests; dynamic invocation; CORBA event service; pros and cons of different communication paradigms of CORBA.
4. Portable Object Adaptor (POA) (12 hours) Objects vs. servants; lifecycle of objects; request invocation via POA; servant activator and servant locator.
5. Case study 1: load balancing (6 hours) Using POA to implement various load balancing solutions for distributed systems.
6. Case study 2: resource management (6 hours) Using CORBA to implement facilities for resource management in distributed systems, e.g. resource lookup, resource acquisition; CORBA naming service.
Laboratory Experiment:
In the laboratory session, students will learn how to develop distributed systems using an implementation of CORBA, called VisiBroker (or the Borland Enterprise Server – VisiBroker Edition), using Java as the programming language.
Case Study:
Case studies on load balancing and resource management with CORBA.
Teaching/ Learning 1. Lecture: students learn the technologies and concepts related to Methodology middleware. 2. Laboratory session: students implement short programs (with guidance of the tutor) related to the lecture to gain experience in using the technologies and concepts learned. The programming tools used are CORBA and Java.
Alignment of Assessment and Specific % Intended Subject Learning Outcomes to Intended Subject Assessment Weighting be Assessed (Please tick as Learning Outcomes Methods/Tasks appropriate) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1. Assignments 40%
2. Mid-term 15%
3. Examination 45%
Total 100%
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes: For the assignments, the students have to design and implement middleware- based systems using CORBA and Java to solve common problems in distributed systems study (e.g., load balancing). This requires good understanding/application of distributed systems concepts and programming skills/techniques in using CORBA/Java to solve real problems.
The mid-term test and the examination aim at assessing the students’ understanding of the concepts related to the theory and practice of middleware and distributed systems.
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 42 Hours
• Seminar/Laboratory 7 Hours
193 Total student study effort: At least 49 Hours
Reading List and Textbook: References 1. W. Emmerich, Engineering Distributed Objects, Wiley, 2000.
Reference Books:
1. F. Bolton, Pure CORBA, Sams, 2002. 2. R. Orfali, D. Harkey and J. Edwards, Client/Server Survival Guide, 3rd ed., Wiley, 1999. 3. IEEE Distributed Systems Online. 4. Articles from journals, magazines, and conference proceedings, including ACM TOCS, IEEE TPDS, IEEE TSE, IEEE TOC, CACM, IEEE Computer, ICDE, DOA.
194 Subject Description Form
Subject Code COMP437
Subject Title Mobile Computing
Credit Value 3
Level 4
Pre-requisite Foundations of Database Systems (COMP311) or Object-Oriented Design and Programming (EIE320) and
Computer Networking and Internet Technologies (EIE323) or Data and Computer Communications (EIE333) or Computer Networks (EIE342)
Co-requisite/ Nil Exclusion
Objectives 1. To learn about the concepts and principles of mobile computing; 2. To explore both theoretical and practical issues of mobile computing; 3. To develop skills of finding solutions and building software for mobile computing applications.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. grasp the concepts and features of mobile computing technologies and applications; 2. have a good understanding of how the underlying wireless and mobile communication networks work, their technical features, and what kinds of applications they can support; 3. identify the important issues of developing mobile computing systems and applications; 4. organize the functionalities and components of mobile computing systems into different layers and apply various techniques for realizing the functionalities; 5. develop mobile computing applications by analyzing their characteristics and requirements, selecting the appropriate computing models and software architectures, and applying standard programming languages and tools; 6. organize and manage software built for deployment and demonstration.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness 7. analyze requirements and solve problems using systematic planning and development approaches; 8. search for and read critically the information required in solving problems; 9. write and present technical survey papers in well-organized and logical manner; 10. work in teams and collaborate with classmates.
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcomes 1, 2: This subject contributes to the programme Outcomes outcomes through the teaching of the related concepts of systems connected by wireless networks, providing the students with an opportunity to apply their knowledge. • Programme Outcomes 4 and 10: This subject contributes to the programme outcomes through project development with computer programming with careful design and implementation.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness
195 • Programme Outcomes 4 and 10: This subject contributes to the programme outcomes through project development with computer programming with careful design and implementation. • Programme Outcomes 9 and 12: This subject contributes to the programme outcomes with group project development and associated report writing.
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Overview of mobile computing (6 hours) Motivations, concepts, challenges, and applications of mobile computing; relationship with distributed computing, Internet computing, ubiquitous/pervasive computing; Mobile computing models and architectures.
2. Wireless networks (6 hours) Wireless communication concepts; classification of wireless networks: Cellar networks (1G, 2G, 3G, 4G), WLAN, WPAN, WMAN, Satellite networks.
3. Mobile device platforms (3 hours) Mobile devices; mobile OS; J2ME, Windows Mobile and .Net Framework, BREW.
4. Wireless Mobile Internet (6 hours) Wireless Internet architecture; Wireless gateway; Wireless application server; Synchronization server; Messaging server; Mobile Internet proxy services (transcoding, caching); Data dissemination; Disconnected operations (hording).
5. Mobile ad hoc networks (9 hours) Concepts and applications; routing in mobile ad hoc networks; sensor networks, mobile peer-to-peer computing.
6. Mobility management (6 hours) Handoff and location management concepts; mobility management in PLMN; mobility management in mobile Internet; mobility management in mobile agent systems; adaptive location management methods.
7. Location-based services (6 hours) LBS applications; mobile positioning techniques; GIS; LBS architecture and protocols.
Tutorials: 3 hours
Labs:
1. WAP programming. (1 hour) 2. J2ME programming. (3 hours)
196
Alignment of Assessment and Specific % Intended Subject Learning Outcomes Intended Subject Assessment Weighting to be Assessed (Please tick as Learning Outcomes Methods/ Tasks appropriate) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1. Continuous 55%
Assessment • Assignments
• Lab exercises
• Project
• Mid-term
2. Examination 45%
Total 100%
Student Study Effort Class contact (time-tabled): Expected • Lecture 42 Hours
• Tutorial/Laboratory 7 Hours
Total student study effort: 49 Hours
Reading List and Textbook: References No particular textbook. Reference books and articles will be used.
Reference Books:
1. M. Mallick, Mobile and Wireless Design Essentials, Wiley Publishing, 2003. 2. R.Y.K. Kwok, V.K.N. Lau, Wireless Internet and Mobile Computing: Interoperability and Performance, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2007. (Google Book) 3. D.P. Agrawal and Q.-A. Zeng, Introduction to Wireless and Mobile Systems, Brooks/Cole, 2nd ed.,Thomson Learning, 2006. 4. Reza B’Far, Mobile Computing Principles: Designing and Developing Mobile Applications with UML and XML, Cambridge University Press, 2005. 5. J. Schiller, Mobile Communications, 2nd ed., Pearson Education, 2003.
197 Subject Description Form
Subject Code EIE408
Subject Title Principles of Virtual Reality
Credit Value 3
Level 4
Pre-requisite/ Co- Nil requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives To provide the theoretical and practical knowledge about virtual reality technologies and the fundamental concepts involved in building and displaying virtual worlds.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. Understand the underlying enabling technologies of VR systems, 2. Design and create a basic virtual environment, and 3. Design an appropriate virtual reality solution for an application.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness 4. Learn independently. 5. Acquire team work and presentation skills. 6. Appreciate the importance of creativity and critical thinking, and to realize that there is no perfect virtual reality system for any particular situation and that engineers have to find “optimal” solutions, or make practical designs. 7. Develop a fuller understanding of social and community issues related to the application of virtual reality systems form case studies.
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcome 1: This subject contributes to the programme Outcomes outcome through teaching of the fundamentals of VR technology and providing the students with an opportunity to practice the application of knowledge. • Programme Outcome 2: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through designing of simple VR systems and providing the students with an opportunity to conduct experiments and solve practical problems through mini-projects.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcome 11: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through student mini-projects. • Programme Outcome 12: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through tutorial discussion and exchange of design idea. • Programme Outcome 13: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing opportunity for the students to understand practical VR system in a number of site visits.
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction to Virtual Reality 1.1 Historical development of Virtual Reality 1.2 The benefits of Virtual Reality 1.3 Generic Virtual Reality Systems 1.4 Real-time computer graphics, virtual environments: visual feedback, tactile feedback, acoustic feedback
2. 3D Computer Graphics 198 2.1 Transformations and the 3D world; Modelling objects, dynamics objects 2.2 Physical modelling: Constraints; Collision Detection, Surface Deformation 2.3 Perspective Views; Stereoscopic Vision
3. Human Factors 3.1 Vision and Display 3.2 Hearing, Tactile and Equilibrium 3.3 Health and Safety Issues
4. VR Hardware 4.1 Computers: Graphics and workstation architectures 4.2 Input Devices: Sensors and transducers, Gloves, 3D mice, 3D trackers, Navigation and Gesture Interfaces 4.3 Output Devices: 3D Sound, Graphics; Haptic Displays, Force feedback Transducers, HMD
5. VR Software 5.1 VR Software features and web-based VR 5.2 Animation and Virtual Environment: linear and non-linear translations, angular rotation; shape and object inbetweening; free-form deformation 5.3 Modelling virtual worlds; physical simulation; VR toolkits 5.4 Programming of Virtual Environment: Mechanics of VRML; VRML browser; creating VRML environment; 3D modellers; worldbuilding toolkits; VRML utilities
6. VR Applications 6.1 Engineering and Industrial : CAD and CAM techniques 6.2 Training, education and simulations: Flight Simulator, Cab Simulator 6.3 Games and entertainment: PC based games, XBOX and Wii
Laboratory Experiment: 1. VR related Hardware 2. VR related Programming Tools 3. Practical VR Systems
Case Study: 1. Applications of VR/VE in Training 2. Applications of VR/VE in Entertainment 3. Applications of VR/VE in Manufacturing and Product Design 4. Applications of VR/VE in Therapy
199
Teaching/ Learning Teaching and Intended Remarks Methodology Learning Method Subject Learning Outcome Lectures 1 Fundamental principles and key concepts of the subject are delivered to students. Tutorials, 5,6,7 These are supplementary to lectures Site visits and are conducted with smaller class sizes; students will be able to clarify concepts and to gain a deeper understanding of the lecture material; problems and application examples are given and discussed. Laboratory 1,2,3,4,5 Students will conduct mini-project to sessions, better understand in the various Mini-project practical aspect of VR Systems.
200 Alignment of Specific Assessment % Intended Subject Learning Assessment and Methods/Tasks Weighting Outcomes to be Assessed Intended Subject (Please tick as appropriate) Learning Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1. Continuous Assessment
(total 50%) • Site visit reports and 20% presentation • Assignments/Tests 5% • Mini-project reports and 25% presentation 2. Examination 50% Total 100%
The continuous assessment consists of a mini-project, a number of site visit and logbooks, case study reports, a number of short quizzes/assignments and a mid-term test.
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Specific Remark Assessment Methods/Tasks Site visit reports These can measure the students’ understanding of the theories and concepts as well as their
comprehension of subject materials. Assignments, tests End-of-chapter-type problems are used to evaluate and examination the students’ ability in applying concepts and skills learnt in the classroom; students need to think critically and to learn independently in order to come up with an alternative solution to an existing problem. Mini-project reports Each group of students are required to produce a and presentation written report; the accuracy and presentation of the report will be assessed; oral examination based on the laboratory exercises will be conducted for each group member to evaluate their technical knowledge and communication skills.
Student Study Class contact (time-tabled): Effort Expected • Lecture 24 Hours
• Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes 18 hours
Other student study effort:
• Lecture: preview/review of notes; 36 Hours homework/assignment; preparation for test/quizzes/examination • Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes: preview of 27 Hours materials, revision and/or reports writing Total student study effort: 105 Hours
201 Reading List and Textbooks: References 1. Gerard Jounghyun Kim, Designing Virtual Reality Systems, the Structured Approach，Springer London, 2005. 2. Grigore C Burdea abd Philippe Coiffet, Virtual Reality Technology, 2nd Eds., Wiley Interscience, 2003. 3. John Vince, Introduction in Virtual Reality, Springer, 2004. 4. John Vince, Virtual Reality Systems, 1st ed., Addison-Wesley, 1995.
Reference Books:
1. Virtual Reality Application Centre, Iowa State University, http://www.vrac.iastate.edu/ 2. IEEE Proceedings in the 2nd International Workshop on Haptic, Audio and Visual Environments and their Applications – HAVE 2003, Ottawa, Canada, 2003. 3. IEEE Proceedings in 2003 IEEE International Symposium on Virtual Environments, Human-Computer Interfaces and Measurement Systems, Lugano, Switzerland, 2003. 4. R Earnshaw, R Guedj, A Dam, and J Vince (Eds), Frontiers of Human- Centred Computing, Online Communities and Virtual Environments, Springer, 2001. 5. John Vince, Essential Reality Fast, Springer, 1998. 6. M.L. McLaughlin, J.P. Hespanha, and G.S.(Eds.), Touch in Virtual Environments, IMSC, 2002. 7. MEDIA LAB at MIT, http://www.media.mit.edu/. 8. Electronic Visualization Laboratory at the University of Illinois in Chicago, http://www.evl.uic.edu/EVL/index.html. 9. Augmented Reality Links http://www.se.rit.edu/~jrv/research/ar/index.html. 10. Virtualized Reality at CMU http://www.cs.cmu.edu/~VirtualizedR/. 11. Augmented Reality & Computer Augmented Environments http://www.csl.sony.co.jp/project/ar/ref.html. 12. Virtual Reality, Augmented Reality, Tele-robotics, http://gypsy.rose.utoronto.ca/bookmarks.html#vr. 13. Virtual Reality in Medicine, http://www.psicologia.net/pages/links.htm. 14. WorldToolKit by Sense8, http://www.sense8.com/index.html. 15. Visualization and Virtual Reality for manufacturing http://ovrt.nist.org/.
202 Subject Description Form
Subject Code EIE414
Subject Title Computer Architecture and Systems
Credit Value 3
Level 4
Pre-requisite Computer System Fundamentals (EIE311) or Computer System Principles (EIE343)
Co-requisite/ Nil Exclusion
Objectives To provide students with 1. Concepts and design techniques of high performance computer architectures 2. Techniques to analyze performance in time domain
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. Understand the fundamental knowledge of microprocessor 2. Design and conduct experiments, as well as to analyze different microprocessors 3. Identify the issues of designing a microprocessor. 4. Write efficient programs along with understanding the limitations and mechanisms of different microprocessors
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness 5. Present their ideas and observation effectively 6. Think critically and creatively
Contribution of the Programme Outcomes: Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcome 1: This subject contributes to the programme Outcomes outcome through teaching of the fundamentals of different microprocessors and providing the students with an opportunity to practice the application of knowledge. • Programme Outcome 3: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through providing the students with an opportunity to conduct experiments and analyze the characteristics of different types of microprocessors. • Programme Outcome 4: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through using simulation tools to evaluate the performance and limitation of different microprocessors. • Programme Outcome 6: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing opportunity for students to identify the issues of designing a microprocessor.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcome 9: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through report writings. • Programme Outcome 10: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing students with an opportunity to understand the creative process. Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction to Computer Architectures 1.1 Revision on different computer architectures: ISA and HAS, Von Neumann, RISC and CISC
203 1.2 Performance issues
2. Basic Processor Designs 2.1 Data path: Data movement 2.2 Control path: Instruction decode and branching 2.3 Multi-cycle Implementation 2.4 Microprogramming 2.5 Exception
3. Pipelined Processors 3.1 Pipelined data-paths and control 3.2 Data hazards 3.3 Branch hazards
4. Superscalar Processing 4.1 Parallel decoding 4.2 Superscalar instruction issue: shelving and register renaming 4.3 Speculative execution: preserving processor consistency
5. Branching Processing 5.1 Branch checking 5.2 Branch processing: delayed branching and multi-way branching 5.3 Speculative execution: early detection and prediction
6. Cache Organization 6.1 Cache mapping: direct mapping and associative mapping 6.2 Replacement algorithm 6.3 Cache miss and performance 6.4 Cache coherence
7. Memory System 7.1 Memory system hierarchy 7.2 Paging 7.3 Segmentation 7.4 Virtual memory
Laboratory Experiments:
1. Superscalar simulation tool. 2. Tracing the operation of superscalar CPU by simulation.
Teaching/ Learning Teaching and Intended Remarks Methodology Learning Method Subject Learning
Outcome Lectures 1, 3, 4, 6 Fundamental principles and key concepts of the subject are delivered to students Tutorials 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 Conducted with smaller class size Students will be able to clarify concepts and to have a deeper understanding of the lecture material Problems and exercises are given and discussed Mini-project 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Students will make use of the software 6 VSIM to simulate various types of Superscalar processors and critically compare their features and performance
204
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment % Intended Subject Learning Intended Subject Methods/Tasks Weighting Outcomes to be Assessed Learning Outcomes (Please tick as appropriate) 1 2 3 4 5 6
1. Continuous Assessment
(total 50%) • Assignments 10%
• Tests 25% • Mini-projects 15% 2. Examination 50% Total 100 %
The continuous assessment will consist of assignments, tests and a mini- project.
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Specific Assessment Remark Methods/Tasks Assignments, tests and Analytical problems are used to evaluate students’ examination ability in analyze performance issues. Students need to think critically and creatively in order to come with an alternate solution for an existing problem.
Mini-project Each student is required to give demonstrations and produce a written report. Accuracy and the presentation of the report will be assessed. Oral examination based on the laboratory exercises will be conducted for each group member to evaluate his technical knowledge and communication skills.
Student Study Class contact (time-tabled): Effort Expected • Lecture 24 Hours
• Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes 18 hours
Other student study effort:
• Lecture: preview/review of notes; 36 Hours homework/assignment; preparation for test/quizzes/examination • Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes: preview of 27 Hours materials, revision and/or reports writing Total student study effort: 105 Hours
Reading List and Reference Books: References 1. D. Sima, T. Fountain and P Kasuk, Advanced Computer Architectures: A Design Space Approach, Addison-Wesley, 1997. 2. J.L. Hennessy and D.A. Patterson, Computer Architecture - A Quantitative Approach, 4th ed., Morgan Kaufmann, 2006. 3. A. Siberschatz and P. Galvin, Operating System Concepts, 8th ed., Addison- Wesley, 2008.
205 4. John Paul Shen and Mikke H. Lipasti, Modern Processor Design – Fundamentals of Superscalar Processors, McGraw-Hill, 2004. 5. David Patterson and John Hennessy, Computer Organization & Design: The Hardware/Software Interface, 3rd ed., The Morgan Kaufmann Series of Computer Architecture and Design, 2004.
206 Subject Description Form
Subject Code EIE424
Subject Title Distributed Systems and Network Programming
Credit Value 3
Level 4
Pre-requisite Principles of Programming (COMP201) or Object Oriented Design and Programming (EIE320)
Co-requisite/ Nil Exclusion
Objectives This subject will provide students with the principles of distributed systems. It enables students to master the development skills for providing and constructing distributed services on the Web. Through a series of lab exercises, students will be able to develop interoperable and distributed Web applications.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. Understand the concepts of distributed computing and distributed systems. 2. Be able to identify the key components in distributed systems. 3. Be able to apply Java to build distributed systems. 4. Understand the advantages and limitations of different distributed system architectures. 5. Understand the enabling technologies for building distributed systems. 6. Understand the different components of Web Services. 7. Be able to set up and configure a standard Web Service system and develop simple Web Service applications. Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness 8. Think critically. 9. Learn independently. 10. Work in a team and collaborate effectively with others. 11. Present ideas and findings effectively.
Contribution of Programme Outcomes: the Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcomes 1: This subject contributes to the programme Outcomes outcome through the teaching of the foundation knowledge in distributed computing and distributed systems and through providing the students with an opportunity to apply this knowledge to practical systems. • Programme Outcome 3: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through providing opportunity for students to design and implement distributed software based on a given specification (user requirements) and some constraints (type of software technology to be used). • Programme Outcomes 4: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing students with the opportunity to use software development tools and internet programming techniques to build web applications and distributed systems.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcome 9: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing students with the opportunity to write technical reports and software documentation. • Programme Outcome 11: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing students with the foundations for life-long learning and continual professional development in the areas of distributed software and systems.
207 • Programme Outcome 12: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing the students with an opportunity to practice working in a team.
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction to Distributed Systems and Distributed Computing 1.1 Operating systems and Multithreading. 1.2 Examples of distributed systems and distributed computing
2. Distributed Computing Paradigms Message passing. Client-server paradigm. Peer-to-peer paradigm. Message system paradigm. Remote procedure call model. Distributed objects paradigm. Mobile agents. Cloud computing.
3. Enabling Tools and Techniques for Building Distributed Systems 3.1 Socket API and socket programming. 3.2 Component-based software development. CORBA. Remote Method Invocation (RMI). COM/DCOM. Enterprise JavaBeans (EJB). 3.3 Extensible Markup Language (XML). XML Markup. XML namespaces. XML Schema.
4. Distributed Services on the Web: Web Services 4.1 Introduction to Web Services. Software as a service. Characteristics of web services. Service-oriented architecture. 4.2 XML-RPC. 4.3 Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP). SOAP specification. Message processing. Use of namespaces. Building web services using SOAP. 4.4 Web Services Description Language (WSDL). Role of WSDL in Web services, WSDL documents, remote web-services invocation using WSDL. 4.5 RESTful Web Services. Resource-oriented architectures. Frameworks for RESTful Services
Laboratory Experiment:
Practical Works 1. Socket API 2. Remote Method Invocation (RMI) 3. Extensible Markup Language (XML) 4. XML-RPC 5. SOAP 6. WSDL
208
Teaching/ Teaching and Intended Remarks Learning Learning Method Subject Methodology Learning Outcome Lectures 1,2,4,5,6 Fundamental principles and key concepts of the subject are delivered to students. Tutorials 1,3,4,5,6,8,9 Supplementary to lectures and are conducted with smaller class size; Students will be able to clarify concepts and to have a deeper understanding of the lecture material; Programming exercises will be provided to strengthen students’ hands- on experiences. Laboratory 3,6,7,8,10,11 Students will go through the sessions development process of various distributed systems and evaluate their performance.
Alignment of Specific % Intended Subject Learning Outcomes to Assessment and Assessment Weighting be Assessed (Please tick as appropriate) Intended Subject Methods/ Learning 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Tasks Outcomes 1. Continuous 40%
Assessment • Short quizzes • Assignments • Tests • Laboratory sessions, mini-project
2. Examination 60% Total 100 %
The continuous assessment consists of assignments, laboratory reports and tests.
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Specific Assessment Remark Methods/Tasks Short quizzes Short multiple choice quizzes are conducted to measure the students’ understanding of the theories
and concepts as well as their comprehension of subject materials. Assignments, tests and Assignments are of two types: (1) short essays on examination different types of distributed systems and (2) programming exercises demonstrating the operating principles of different distributed systems. The purposes are to strengthen students’ understanding on the topics they learnt in classes. Students will be accessed based on their ability in
209 applying concepts and skills learnt in the classroom.
Students need to think critically and creatively in order to come with an alternate solution for an existing problem. Test and examinations are given to students to
assess their competence level of knowledge and comprehension and their ability to apply knowledge and skills in new situations. The criteria (i.e. what to be demonstrated) and level (i.e. the extent) of achievement will be graded according to six levels: Excellent (A+ and A), Good
(B+ and B), Satisfactory (C+ and C), Marginal (D) and Failure (F). These will be made known to the students before an assignment/homework is given. Feedback about their performance will be given promptly to students to help them improvement their learning.
Laboratory sessions Students are required to build two to three and lab reports distributed systems and web services during the lab sessions. They are also required to write reports to explain the architecture and operating principle of their systems. Students will be accessed based on (1) their ability to apply knowledge that they learn in
classes to build distributed systems and (2) their ability to write a clear report that explains the principle of operation and architecture of the systems that they have created.
210
Student Study Class contact (time-tabled): Effort Expected • Lecture 24 Hours
• Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes 18 hours
Other student study effort:
• Lecture: preview/review of notes; 36 Hours homework/assignment; preparation for test/quizzes/examination • Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes: preview of 27 Hours materials, revision and/or reports writing Total student study effort: 105 Hours
Reading List and Textbooks: References 1. M.L. Liu, Distributed Computing: Principles and Applications, Addison-Wesley, 2004. 2. M.P. Papazoglou, Web Services: Principles and Technology, Prentice-Hall, 2008.
Reference Books:
1. G. Coulouris, Distributed Systems: Concepts and Design, 4th ed, Addison- Wesley, 2005. 2. A.S. Tanenbaum and M. Van Steen, Distributed Systems: Principles and Paradigms, Prentice-Hall, 2007. 3. IEEE Internet Computing. 4. IEEE Distributed Systems Online.
211 Subject Description Form
Subject Code EIE426
Subject Title Artificial Intelligence and Computer Vision
Credit Value 3
Level 4
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives 1. To introduce the student the major ideas, methods, and techniques of Artificial Intelligence (AI) and computer vision; 2. To develop an appreciation for various issues in the design of intelligent systems; and 3. To provide the student with programming experience from implementing AI techniques, simple knowledge systems, and computer vision applications.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. Understand the benefits and limitations of current AI techniques, its culture and society impacts, and possible future development. 2. Implement major game search techniques for simple computer games. 3. Apply machine learning techniques to information processing and data mining. 4. Develop simple knowledge systems for internet and engineering applications. 5. Explore robotics and computer vision techniques, and their applications to entertainment and engineering domains. Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness 6. Communicate effectively, and present ideas and findings clearly in oral and written forms. 7. Think critically and creatively. 8. Demonstrate self-learning and life-long learning capability. 9. Work in a team and collaborate effectively with others. 10. Recognize social responsibility and ethics.
Contribution of Programme Outcomes: the Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcomes 1, 3, and 5: This subject contributes to the Outcomes programme outcomes through teaching of the theories and concepts of artificial intelligence and computer vision and through providing the students with an opportunity to apply their knowledge. • Programme Outcomes 2, 3, and 4: This subject contributes to the programme outcomes by providing the students with laboratory exercises to simulate search techniques, to construct simple knowledge systems using a knowledge system shell, and to apply machine learning techniques to practical problems. • Programme Outcomes 2, 3, 4, 5, and 7: This subject contributes to the programme outcomes through a group mini-project to develop a simple intelligence system. • Programme Outcomes 2 and 7: This subject contributes to the programme outcomes through teaching of useful tools for building artificial intelligence and computer vision systems.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcome 9: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing students with an opportunity to think critically and creatively about various artificial intelligence and computer vision methodologies. • Programme Outcome 10: This subject contributes to the programme
212 outcome by providing students with the foundations for life-long learning and continual professional development in the areas of artificial intelligence and computer vision. • Programme Outcomes 8, 9, 10, and 11: This subject contributes to the programme outcomes by providing students with an opportunity to work as a team in developing a simple intelligence system. • Programme Outcome 13: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through a discussion on the culture and society impacts of artificial intelligence techniques.
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction The Definitions and Foundations of AI, the History of AI, and the State of the Art.
2. Intelligent Agents Agents and Environments, the Concept of Rationality, the Nature of Environments, the Structure of Agents, Applications.
3. Blind and Informed Search Methods Problem-Solving Agents, Example Problems, Searching for Solutions, Uninformed Search Strategies, Avoiding Repeated States, Searching with Partial Information, Informed (Heuristic) Search Strategies, Heuristic Functions, Local Search Algorithms and Optimization Problems, Local Search in Continuous Spaces, Online Search Agents and Unknown Environments.
4. Game Playing Games, Optimal Decisions in Games, Alpha-Beta Pruning, Imperfect Decisions, Games That Include an Element of Chance, State-of-the-Art Game Programs.
5. Knowledge Systems Rule-Based Deduction Systems, Rule-Based Reaction Systems, Forward and Backward Chaining, the Knowledge Engineering Process, Analysis of Typical Knowledge Systems.
6. Machine Learning Forms of Learning, Inductive Learning, Learning Decision Trees, Computational Learning Theory, Machine Learning Techniques for Intelligent Information Processing and Data Mining.
7. Computer Vision Imaging and Representation, Image Preprocessing, Extracting 3-D Information, Object Recognition, Using Vision for Manipulation and Navigation, Eye Tracking Techniques and Applications, Concepts of Virtual Reality, Applications.
8. Robotics Robot Hardware, Robotic Perception, Planning to Move, Planning Uncertain Movements, Robotic Software Architectures, Entertainment Robots, Engineering Applications.
9. Culture and Society Impacts Understanding Intelligence: Issues and Directions, the Ethics and Risks of Developing Artificial Intelligence Solutions.
Laboratory Experiments:
1. Search methods and machine game playing 2. Eye tracking applications
213
Teaching/ Teaching and Intended Remarks Learning Learning Subject Methodology Method Learning Outcome Lectures 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, fundamental principles and key concepts of 10 the subject are delivered to students; guidance on further readings, applications and implementation is given. Tutorials 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, supplementary to lectures and are 7, 10 conducted with smaller class size; students will be able to clarify concepts and to have a deeper understanding of the lecture material; problems and application examples are given and discussed. Laboratory 2, 5, 6, 7, 8 students will develop simple computer sessions games using software tools; students will collect eye tracking data using an eye tracker and analyze the collected data. Mini-project 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, students in a group of 3-4 are required to 6, 7, 8, 9 work on an intelligent system chosen by the group.
214
Alignment of Assessment and Specific % Intended Subject Learning Outcomes to Intended Subject Assessment Weighting be Assessed (Please tick as Learning Methods/Tasks appropriate) Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1. Continuous 45%
Assessment • Tests • Laboratory Report
• Mini-project: Type A
Demo, Type B Presentation, Type C Report Type D
2. Examination 55%
Total 100 %
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Specific Assessment Remark Methods/Tasks Tests and examination end-of chapter type problems used to evaluate students’ ability in applying concepts and skills learnt in the classroom; students need to think critically and creatively in order to come with an alternate solution for an existing problem. Lab report Each student is required to produce a written report; accuracy and the presentation of the report will be assessed. Mini-project each group of students are required to produce a written report; accuracy and the presentation of the report will be assessed; the functions and performance of the developed intelligent system will be assessed in the demo session; a presentation session will be arranged to assess technical knowledge and communication skills of each group member.
Student Study Class contact (time-tabled): Effort Expected • Lecture 24 Hours
• Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes 18 hours
Other student study effort:
• Lecture: preview/review of notes; 36 Hours homework/assignment; preparation for test/quizzes/examination • Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes: preview of 27 Hours
215 materials, revision and/or reports writing
Total student study effort: 105 Hours
Reading List and Reference Books: References 1. G.F. Luger, Artificial Intelligence: Structures and Strategies for Complex Problem Solving, 6th ed., Pearson Education, 2009. 2. L.G. Shapiro and G. Stockman, Computer Vision, Prentice-Hall, 2001. 3. S. Russell and P. Norvig, Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach, 2nd ed., Prentice-Hall, 2003. 4. A. Duchowski, Eye Tracking Methodology: Theory and Practice, 2nd ed., Springer-Verlag, 2007. 5. P.H. Winston, Artificial Intelligence, 3rd ed., Addison-Wesley, 1992.
216 Subject Description Form
Subject Code EIE428
Subject Title Multimedia Communications
Credit Value 3
Level 4
Pre-requisite Data and Computer Communications (EIE333) or Computer Networks (EIE342)
Co-requisite/ Nil Exclusion
Objectives To study the technical issues and system solutions for providing multimedia communications on the Internet.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. Understand the current state-of-the-art developments in Internet technologies for multimedia communications. 2. Appreciate the principles used in designing multimedia protocols, and so understand why standard protocols are designed the way that they are. 3. Understand the system design principles of multimedia communications systems. 4. Solve problems and design simple networked multimedia systems.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness 5. Present ideas and findings effectively. 6. Think critically and learn independently.
Contribution of Programme Outcomes: the Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcome 1: This subject contributes to the programme outcome Outcomes through teaching of Internet technologies and multimedia communications systems. • Programme Outcomes 2: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through the teaching of the knowledge of multimedia communications and through providing the students with an opportunity to apply their knowledge. • Programme Outcomes 3, 5, 6: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing the opportunity for students to solve practical engineering problems pertaining to the field of multimedia communications.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcome 10: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing students with an opportunity to think critically about and practice the different multimedia communication techniques for different applications. • Programme Outcome 11: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing students with the foundations for life-long learning and continual professional development in the areas of multimedia communications.
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Terminal/Codec Support for Multimedia Communications Scalable Coding: SNR Scalability, Spatial Scalability, Temporal Scalability and Fine Granularity Scalability (FGS) Error Control: Error Propagation, Error Resilience Coding Techniques 217 Rate Control: Concepts for Rate Control, MPEG TM5 Rate Control Algorithms
2. Network Layer Support for Multimedia Communications IP Multimedia: Internet Multicast Model, Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP), Group Shared Tree and Source Based Tree, Multicast Routing Algorithms
3. Transport Layer Support for Multimedia Communications TCP congestion control, TCP Delay Analysis, TCP Throughput Analysis, Bandwidth Allocation Media transport protocols: Real Time Protocol (RTP) and Real Time Control Protocol (RTCP); Signalling Protocols: Real-Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP)
4. Quality of Services (QoS) Integrated services (intserv): Architecture and Service Model, Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP), Packet Scheduling Disciplines in the Internet Differentiated Services (diffserv): Framework and Concept, Assured and Expedited Services, Packet Classification, Routers Internals and Packet Dropping Techniques
5. Multimedia Streaming Systems Streaming architecture: Real-time Streaming and On-demand Streaming, Congestion Control, Scalable Transmission, Streaming Server Design, Buffering and Scheduling Techniques, Data Sharing Techniques, Support of Interactive Operations, Case Studies on Video on Demand and IPTV
Laboratory Experiments: 1. Simulation study on congestion control 2. Multimedia networking 3. Multimedia streaming
Teaching/ Teaching and Intended Remarks Learning Learning Method Subject Methodology Learning Outcome Lectures 1, 2, 3 fundamental principles and key concepts of the subject are delivered to students Tutorials 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 supplementary to lectures and are conducted with smaller class size; students will be able to clarify concepts and to have a deeper understanding of the lecture material; problems and application examples are given and discussed Laboratory 4, 5, 6 students will make use of network sessions simulators to simulate various types of communication networks and evaluate their performance
218
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment % Intended Subject Learning Intended Subject Methods/Tasks Weighting Outcomes to be Assessed (Please Learning tick as appropriate) Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6
1. Continuous Assessment (total 40%) • Assignments 4%
• Tests 24% • Mini-Project 12% 2. Examination 60% Total 100%
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Specific Assessment Remark Methods/Tasks Short quizzes mainly objective tests (e.g., multiple-choice questions, true-false, and matching items)
conducted to measure the students’ ability to remember facts and figures as well as their comprehension of subject materials Assignments, tests and end-of chapter type problems used to evaluate examination students’ ability in applying concepts and skills learnt in the classroom; students need to think critically and creatively in order to come with an alternate solution for an existing problem Laboratory sessions each group of students are required to produce a written report; accuracy and the presentation of the report will be assessed.
Student Study Class contact (time-tabled): Effort Expected • Lecture 24 Hours
• Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes 18 hours
Other student study effort:
• Lecture: preview/review of notes; 36 Hours homework/assignment; preparation for test/quizzes/examination • Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes: preview of 27 Hours materials, revision and/or reports writing Total student study effort: 105 Hours
Reading List and Reference Books: References 1. J. K. Kurose, Computer Networking: A Top-down Approach Featuring the Internet, 5th ed., Addison-Wesley, 2010. 2. K.R. Rao, Z.S. Bojkovic and D.A. Milovanovic, Multimedia Communication Systems: Techniques, Standards, and Networks, Prentice-Hall PTR, 2002. 3. S. Vegesna, IP Quality of Service, Prentice-Hall PTR, 2001.
219 4. Colin Perkins, RTP: Audio and Video for the Internet, Addison-Wesley, 2003. 5. A. Dashti, S.H. Kim, C. Shahabi and R. Zimmermann, Streaming Media Server Design, Prentice-Hall PTR, 2002.
220 Subject Description Form
Subject Code EIE429
Subject Title Corporate Networking
Credit Value 3
Level 4
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite
Exclusion Corporate Communication Networks (EIE439)
Objectives Telecommunication and computer networking technologies have been advancing rapidly in recent years. New technologies have been developed, and new economic orders have been built. Against this background, this subject is designed to:
1. Give a practical treatment on the design, implementation and management of multinational corporate networks. 2. Introduce the variety of facilities, technologies and communication systems to meet future needs of network services. 3. Discuss in details network planning, management, marketing, performance and security issues. 4. Evaluate critically the performance of existing and emerging global communication networking technologies and their impact on enterprise and world economy.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. Describe the operational, marketing, functional attributes of different components of enterprise networks. 2. Evaluate critically the design, implementation, and performance of enterprise networks with regard to different criteria. 3. Design enterprise networking solutions by taking into account various constraints and requirements.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness 4. Develop a global outlook by recognizing the effect of advancement in communication technologies on business opportunity and world economic, social and cultural development. 5. Think and evaluate critically. 6. Take up new technology for life-long learning. 7. Present ideas and findings effectively. 8. Work in a team, and collaborate effectively with other members.
Contribution of Programme Outcomes: the Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcome 1: This subject contributes to the programme outcome Outcomes through teaching of the new telecommunication and computer network technologies, and providing the students with an opportunity to identify the different aspects of Internet and multimedia systems. • Programme Outcome 2: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through the study of a network simulator and the performance investigation of IP phones, and providing the students with an opportunity to identify, analyze and solve technical problems related to Internet and multimedia technologies. • Programme Outcome 6: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing opportunity for students working on self-study projects to
221 appreciate and identify factors/issues related to product/industrial design; and generate and evaluate design solutions to solve a specific problem.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcome 9: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through the presentations and report writing in self-study projects to communicate effectively, and present ideas and findings clearly in oral and written forms. • Programme Outcome 10: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through teaching of the new telecommunication and computer network technologies, and providing the students with an opportunity to think critically and creatively. • Programme Outcome 11: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through taking up new technology to demonstrate self-learning and life-long learning capability. • Programme Outcome 12: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing the opportunity for students working on self-study projects to collaborate effectively with other members in a team, and demonstrate leadership capability.
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Communication Networks and their Features Global networks, enterprise networks, private networks, network topology and optimization, network evolution strategy. 2. Protocols and Technologies WAN protocols, Virtual Local Area Network, IP Switching and MPLS, Metro Ethernet WAN, Voice over IP, Softswitch. 3. Network Security Cryptography, firewall, IP Security, Virtual Private Network (VPN). 4. Traffic Theory and Marketing Teletraffic theory, tariff and cost analysis, deregulations.
Laboratory Experiments: 1. Voice over IP experiment and softswitch. 2. Virtual Private Network and IP Security. 3. LAN switching management.
222
Teaching/ Teaching and Intended Remarks Learning Learning Method Subject Methodology Learning Outcome Lectures, 1,2 In lectures, students are introduced to supplemented the knowledge of the subject, with interactive comprehension is strengthened with questions and interactive Q&A and short quizzes. answers, and They will be able to explain and short quizzes generalize complex structure of knowledge (e.g. relationship between different players in the telecommunication market) Tutorials where 3,5,6 In tutorials, students apply what they case studies are have learnt in analyzing the cases and conducted, and solving the problems given by the tutor. problems are They will analyze the given information, given to students compare and contrast different for them to solve scenarios (e.g. the pros and cons of using different networking technologies in different situations) and propose solutions or alternatives. Three laboratory 4-8 Students perform hands-on tasks in exercises, where laboratory to either strengthen what students will they have learnt or explore new perform hands-on frontiers. They will be able to tasks in different synthesize a structure of knowledge by topics. After the designing and planning the tasks, and laboratory, they relate the observation to theories and will have to write a principles. They will also evaluate report to reflect on outcomes of the tasks they perform what they have and interpret the data they gather (e.g. learnt and the the security features afforded by VPN experience and routers, and their pros and cons). knowledge they have derived. Assignment and 1-6 Through working assignment and Homework, homework, and end-of-chapter solving end-of- problems in text books, students will chapter problems develop a firm understanding and comprehension of the knowledge taught. They will analyze given information and apply knowledge in solving problem. For some design type of questions (e.g. designing an Intranet for a company), they will have to synthesize solutions by evaluating different alternatives.
223
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment % Intended Subject Learning Intended Subject Methods/Tasks Weighting Outcomes to be Assessed Learning (Please tick as appropriate) Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 1. Continuous 50%
Assessment • Assignment/Homework/ Case study reports
• Laboratory works and reports • Mid-semester test
• End-of-semester test 2. Examination 50% Total 100%
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Specific Assessment Remark
Methods/Tasks Assignment/Homework/ Assignment/Homework and case study reports are Case study reports given to students to assess their competence level of knowledge and comprehension, ability to analyze given information, ability to apply knowledge and skills in new situation, ability to synthesize structure, and ability to evaluate given data to make judgment. The criteria (i.e. what to be demonstrated) and level (i.e. the extent) of achievement will be graded according to six levels: (A+ and A), Good (B+ and B), Satisfactory (C+ and C), Marginal (D) and Failure (F). These will be made known to the students before an assignment/homework is given. Feedback about their performance will be given promptly to students to help them improvement their learning. Laboratory works and Students will be required to perform three reports laboratory works and write three laboratory reports. The emphasis is on assessing their ability to apply, synthesize and evaluate. Expectation and grading criteria will be given as in the case of assignment/homework. Mid-semester test There will be a mid-semester test to evaluate students’ achievement of all the learning outcomes and give feedback to them for prompt improvement. Expectation and grading criteria will be given as in the case of assignment/homework. End-of-semester test There will be an end-of-semester test and and Examination examination to assess students’ achievement of all the learning outcomes. These are mainly summative in nature. Expectation and grading criteria will be given as in the case of assignment/homework.
224
Student Study Class contact (time-tabled): Effort Expected • Lecture 24 Hours
• Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes 18 hours
Other student study effort:
• Lecture: preview/review of notes; 36 Hours homework/assignment; preparation for test/quizzes/examination • Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes: preview of 27 Hours materials, revision and/or reports writing Total student study effort: 105 Hours
Reading List and Textbooks: References 1. V. Theoharakis, Enterprise Networking: Multilayer Switching and Applications, Idea Group Pub., 2002
Reference Books:
1. Thomas J. Housel, Global Telecommunications Revolution: The Business Perspective, McGraw-Hill/Irwin, 2001. 2. R.R. Panko, Corporate Computer and Network Security, Prentice-Hall, 2004. 3. D. Cameron, Global Network Security: Threats and Countermeasures, Computer Technology Research Corp., 2000. 4. Handbook of Telecommunications Economics, Amsterdam; Boston, Mass.: Elsevier, 2002. 5. M. Mueller, Telecom Policy and Digital Convergence, City University of Hong Kong Press, 1997. 6. Global Networks, Linked Cities, Routledge, 2002. 7. Jean-Jacques, Competition in Telecommunications, MIT Press, 2000. 8. D. Minoli, Enterprise Networking: Fractional T1 to SONET, Frame Relay to BISDN, Artech House, 1993.
225 Subject Description Form
Subject Code EIE430
Subject Title Honours Project
Credit Value 6
Level 4
Pre-requisite/ Nil Co-requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives Students studying in a curriculum will be most benefited from doing a project in order to have the chance to practise hands-on application of the knowledge the student has learned throughout the curriculum, while producing something useful or valuable. Against this background, there is a final year project (FYP) component in the curriculum with the objectives:
1. To provide the opportunity to the student so that he/she can apply what he/she has learnt in previous stages in a real-life technological problem 2. To enable the student to acquire and practise project management skills and discipline while pursuing the FYP 3. To enable the student to apply knowledge in internet and multimedia technologies to analyze problems and synthesize solutions while considering various constraints
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. Understand, take up, and master the basic knowledge and skills related to the specific project 2. Understand the background, the requirements, objectives, and deliverables to be produced 3. Integrate and apply knowledge learnt in present and previous stages (vertical integration) and across different subjects (horizontal integration) 4. Apply various professional skills in internet and multimedia technologies to achieve the objectives of the project 5. Learn to use new tools and facilities, and to gather new information, for the conduction of the project
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness 6. Work under the guidance of a supervisor while exercising self-discipline to manage the project 7. Review critically the student’s own achievement and other related works 8. Communicate effectively with related parties (supervisor, peers, vendors) 9. Work with others (team partners, outsource company, technical support staff) collaboratively 10. Realize different constraints, and to make appropriate compromise, when designing a solution to a technical problem 11. Disseminate effectively the results and knowledge learnt in the project 12. Transfer the knowledge and skills learnt in the project.
Contribution of Programme Outcomes: the Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcomes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8: In working through the final-year Outcomes project, the students will need to draw on all the professional and academic skills developed throughout the programme. The students will learn how to apply knowledge learnt in the curriculum in designing solutions to problems with consideration of professionalism and realistic constraints such as economic, environmental, social, political, ethical, health and safety, manufacturability and sustainability factors. They also will learn how to make
226 use of appropriate Internet and multimedia tools with an understanding of their processes and limitations in the course of the conducting the project. While each project is individual, the broad range of skills and knowledge required to successfully complete the final year project is drawn from the same pool.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcome 9: In this subject, the students will learn how to conduct effective written or verbal communication with various parties. They will use different media such as texts, mathematics, graphics, images, video, animation, etc. They will learn how to use different communication tools such as log book, project proposal, final-year project report, presentation, and demonstration to communicate their ideas, the project design, the underlying theory, and the project results to various audience in the suitable context. • Programme Outcome 10: The students will be given the chance to exercise creativity and innovation by designing something new (a new software, a new hardware, a new process, a new method) to solve a given problem as required by the project. • Programme Outcome 12: In the final-year project, the student will learn how to work with others (supervisor, other students. other teaching staff, technicians, vendors, industrialists, etc.) to accomplish the project tasks and to produce the deliverables. They will need to communicate/consult people in other disciplines, cooperate with others in the use or acquiring of resources. The students will be given the chance to learn how to exercise leadership when working in a team project or group project that requires collaboration among different students. • Programme Outcomes 11 and 13: In this subject, the students will learn how to gather information about the background or frontier of their projects and related subject matters. They will learn how to stay abreast of contemporary issues by reading and information gathering. They will recognize the need for life-long learning, and appreciate the importance of social responsibility and ethics when a product is designed and put to the market.
Subject Syllabus: Synopsis/ Indicative The progression of the project will be guided by a framework, which consists of Syllabus the following indicative stages. The specific details will vary from project to project.
Project Specification In this stage, the student will work in conjunction with the project supervisor to draw up a concrete project plan specifying at least the following:
1. Background of the project 2. Aims and objectives 3. Deliverables 4. Methodology to be adopted 5. Schedule
Project Execution This is the major part of the project. After the specification is done, the project will be pursued so that the objectives are to be met; the deliverables are to be produced in accordance with the schedule. The student and the project supervisor will meet constantly to discuss the progress. In particular the following should be demonstrated:
1. Adherence to the schedule 2. Achievement of objectives by the student’s work 3. Initiatives of the students to work, design, and solve problems 4. Inquisitiveness of the student (e.g. to probe into different phenomena or to try different approaches) 5. Diligence of the students to spend sufficient effort on the project 6. Systematic documentation of data, design, results, etc. during the process of working out the project
Project Report After the project is finished, it is important that the student is competent in
227 disseminating the results for others to review. Through this dissemination process, project achievements can be communicated, experience can be shared, knowledge and skills learnt can be retained and transferred. The following elements will be important as evidence of students’ achievement:
1. Project log book (documenting the work done over the year) 2. Project report (hardcopy and softcopy) 3. Presentation 4. Performance in a Question-and-Answer session 5. Demonstration
Alignment of Assessment and Specific % Intended Subject Learning Outcomes to be Assessment Assessed (Please tick as appropriate) Intended Subject Weighting Learning Methods/ Outcomes Task 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Continuous 100% Assessment Total 100%
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Specific Assessment Remark Methods/Tasks Continuous assessment The assessment of the project work is done continuously throughout the whole project period. The evidence of students’ achievement will be documented in the log book and reports submitted in various stages. The student will be required to give presentations and demonstrations so that he/she can communicate with other parties about the project achievement.
Student Study Class contact (time-tabled): Effort Expected • Project development 84 Hours
• Self-work/ Guided Study 84 Hours
Other student study effort:
• Reports 24 Hours
• Presentation and demonstration 8 Hours
Total student study effort: 200 Hours
Reading List and Reference Books: References To be specified by the project supervisor for each project.
228 Subject Description Form
Subject Code EIE431
Subject Title Digital Video Production and Broadcasting
Credit Value 3
Level 4
Pre-requisite/ Co- Nil requisite/ Exclusion
Objectives This subject provides a broad knowledge of digital video production and broadcasting.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. Understand the fundamentals of digital video systems with emphasis on production and broadcasting. 2. Work with digital video editing tools. 3. Understand the system design principles of video broadcasting. 4. Design simple systems related to video broadcasting. 5. Facilitate for further development in advanced digital video production and broadcasting.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness. 6. Learn independently.
Contribution of Programme Outcomes: the Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcomes 1: This subject contributes to the programme Outcomes outcomes through the teaching of the theories and concepts of digital video production and broadcasting and through providing the students with an opportunity to apply their knowledge. • Programme Outcome 3: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through teaching the different ways of solving technical problems related to digital video production and broadcasting. • Programme Outcome 4: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through the teaching of software tools for creating and editing digital video.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcome 11: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing students with the foundations for life-long learning and continual professional development in the areas of video broadcasting.
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction to Video Production and Broadcasting Elements of a video production and broadcasting system. Video services in Hong Kong. Video production and broadcasting standards and current development.
2. Fundamental of Video Production Production process, pre-production, production and post-production. Digital video editing.
3. Video Production and Recording Equipments Digital camera and video camera, video cassette recorder (VCR), digital video recorder, storage media, VCD, DVD-video. Video player: DVD player and advanced digital video player with full VCR support.
229
4. Analog Video Broadcasting Standards Component video and composite video, NTSC, and PAL.
5. Fundamental of Digital Video Broadcasting Digital video coding standards, Video transport layer, and transmission layer.
6. Video Transport Layer MPEG-2 systems and multiplexing, programme specific information and service information.
7. Error Control for Digital Video Quality of service requirements for video communications. Error resilience and concealment techniques for digital video. Transport protocols for multimedia communications. Video streaming over the Internet.
8. Digital Video Broadcasting Techniques and Standards Channel coding for error control in digital TV, Digital modulation technique and conditional access for digital TV.
Laboratory Experiments:
1. Basic video editing tools 2. Digital video editing – visual effects 3. Digital video editing – Layering and keying clips
Teaching/ Teaching and Intended Remarks Learning Learning Method Subject Methodology Learning Outcome Lectures 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 fundamental principles and key concepts of the subject are delivered to students Tutorials 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 supplementary to lectures and are conducted with smaller class size; students will be able to clarify concepts and to have a deeper understanding of the lecture material; problems and application examples are given and discussed Laboratory 2, 6 students will make use of digital video sessions editing tools
230
Alignment of Assessment and Specific % Intended Subject Learning Outcomes Intended Subject Assessment Weighting to be Assessed (Please tick as Learning Methods/Tasks appropriate) Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6
1. Continuous Assessment (total 40%) • Short quizzes/ 10% Assignments
• Tests 20% • Laboratory 10% sessions
2. Examination 60% Total 100%
The continuous assessment will consist of laboratory reports, a number of short
quizzes, assignments, and tests.
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Specific Assessment Remark Methods/Tasks Short quizzes mainly objective tests (e.g., multiple-choice questions, true-false, and matching items)
conducted to measure the students’ ability to remember facts and figures as well as their comprehension of subject materials Assignments, tests and end-of chapter type problems used to evaluate examination students’ ability in applying concepts and skills learnt in the classroom; students need to think critically and creatively in order to come with an alternate solution for an existing problem Laboratory sessions each group of students are required to produce a written report; accuracy and the presentation of the report will be assessed; oral examination based on the laboratory exercises will be conducted for each group member to evaluate his technical knowledge and communication skills
Student Study Class contact (time-tabled): Effort Expected • Lecture 24 Hours
• Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes 18 hours
Other student study effort:
• Lecture: preview/review of notes; 36 Hours homework/assignment; preparation for test/quizzes/examination • Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes: preview of 27 Hours materials, revision and/or reports writing
231 Total student study effort: 105 Hours
Reading List and Reference Books: References 1. U. Reimers, DVB: The Family of International Standards for Digital Video Broadcasting, Springer, 2005. 2. Richard Brice, Newnes Guide to Digital TV, Newnes, 2003. 3. Gerald Millerson, Television Production, Focal Press, 2001.
232 Subject Description Form
Subject Code EIE432
Subject Title Web Systems and Technologies
Credit Value 3
Level 4
Pre-requisite Information Technology (ENG224)
Co-requisite/ Nil Exclusion
Objectives This subject will provide students with the principles and practical programming skills of developing Internet and Web applications. It enables students to master the development skill for both client-side and server-side programming, especially for database applications. Students will have opportunity to put into practice the concepts through programming exercises based on various components of client/server web programming.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. Understand the enabling technologies for building Internet and Web database applications. 2. Understand the different components for developing client/server applications. 3. Apply the techniques and features of the client/server development languages to construct a database application based on Internet. 4. Develop the web database applications through programming exercises.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness 5. Present ideas and findings effectively. 6. Learn independently.
Contribution of Programme Outcomes: the Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcome 1: This subject contributes to the programme outcome Outcomes through the teaching of the theories and concepts of web technologies and through providing the students with an opportunity to apply their knowledge. • Programme Outcome 3: This subject contributes to the programme outcome through teaching the different ways of building Internet and web applications. • Programme Outcome 4: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing the opportunity for students to solve practical problems pertaining to the fields of Internet and Web applications.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcome 11: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing students with the foundations for life-long learning and continual professional development in the areas of Web applications.
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Introduction to Client/Server Computing 1.1 The basic principles of client/server computing; Distinguished characteristics of client/server systems and application areas; Comparison of 2 tier versus three tier client/server solutions; Web programming model; Interactive web.
2. Web Programming 2.1 Client Side Web Programming: Benefits and limitation of client-side web 233 programming; Byte code versus scripting. Basic concepts and development based on Java applet, Java script & dynamic HTML (DHTML). 2.2 Server Side Web Programming: Approaches to server-side programming. Benefits and limitations of server-side web programming. Development framework for server-side programming based on PHP/servlet/JSP. 2.3 Web application development. Development of a web application using client-side programming, server-side side programming and AJAX techniques
3. Web Database 3.1 Introduction to Database: File and database processing systems; Definition of database; DBMS examples. 3.2 Data Modelling: Entity relationship model; Elements of the E.R. model. 3.3 Database Design and Implementation: Relation model; Mapping an ER model to table model; Mapping entities and attributes; Normalization; Foundations of relational implementation; Defining relational data; Relational data manipulation; Relational algebra; Structured query language; Restricting and sorting data; Displaying data from multiple tables. 3.4 Web Database Applications: Multi-tier architecture; Principle of web database applications: store, manage and retrieve data.
Laboratory Experiments:
Practical Works: 1. Client-side web application programming. 2. Server-side web application programming. 3. Database driven web design. 4. Evaluation of commercially available database management systems. 5. Creating and managing a database. 6. Web database Applications.
Teaching/ Teaching Intended Remarks Learning and Subject Methodology Learning Learning Method Outcome Lectures 1, 2 fundamental principles and key concepts of the subject are delivered to students. Tutorials 1, 2 supplementary to lectures; students will be able to clarify concepts and to have a deeper understanding of the lecture material; problems and application examples are given and discussed. Laboratory 3, 4, 6 students will develop client-side and server- sessions side web applications. Mini-project 3, 4, 5, 6 students in groups of 2 are required to develop a database driven web application. Each group is required to perform a detailed study and make a presentation.
234
Alignment of Assessment and Specific % Intended Subject Learning Outcomes to Intended Subject Assessment Weighting be Assessed (Please tick as Learning Methods/Tasks appropriate) Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6
1. Continuous Assessment (total 40%) • Short 10% quizzes
• Tests 20% • Laboratory 10% sessions
2. Examination 60% Total 100%
The continuous assessment consists of a number of short quizzes, assignments,
laboratory reports and two tests.
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Specific Assessment Remark Methods/Tasks Short quizzes mainly objective tests (e.g., multiple-choice questions, true-false, and matching items)
conducted to measure the students’ ability to remember facts and figures as well as their comprehension of subject materials. Tests and examination end-of chapter type problems used to evaluate students’ ability in applying concepts and skills learnt in the classroom; students need to think critically and creatively in order to come with an alternate solution for an existing problem. Laboratory sessions, oral examination based on the laboratory mini-project exercises will be conducted to evaluate student’s technical knowledge and communication skills.
235
Student Study Class contact (time-tabled): Effort Expected • Lecture 24 Hours
• Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes 18 hours
Other student study effort:
• Lecture: preview/review of notes; 36 Hours homework/assignment; preparation for test/quizzes/examination • Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes: preview of 27 Hours materials, revision and/or reports writing Total student study effort: 105 Hours
Reading List and Textbooks: References 1. M. Hall, Core Web Programming, Prentice, 2003. 2. D.M. Kroenke, Database Processing Fundamentals, Design and Implementation, 8/e., Prentice-Hall, 2001.
Reference Books:
1. F.J. Cooper et al., Implementing Internet Security, New Riders, 1995. 2. Peter Rossbach and Hendrik Schreiber, Java Server and Servlets, Addison- Wesley, 2000. 3. Jason Hunter and William Crawford, Java Servlet Programming, 2nd ed., O’Reilly, 2001. 4. Susan Boardman, Melanie Caffrey, Solomon Morse and Benjamin Rosenzweig, Oracle Web Application Programming for PL/SQL Developers, Prentice-Hall, 2003. 5. Michael V. Mannino, Database, Design, Applications Development, & Administration, 2nd ed., McGraw-Hill, 2004.
236 Subject Description Form
Subject Code EIE435
Subject Title Image and Audio Processing
Credit Value 3
Level 4
Pre-requisite Linear Systems (EIE312) or Signal Processing Fundamentals (EIE327) or Signals and Systems (EIE341)
Co-requisite/ Nil Exclusion
Objectives To provide a broad treatment of the fundamentals in image and audio processing.
Intended Subject Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: Learning Outcomes Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills 1. Understand the fundamentals of image and audio signal processing and associated techniques. 2. Understand how to solve practical problems with some basic image and audio signal processing techniques. 3. Have the ability to design simple systems for realizing some multimedia applications with some basic image and audio signal processing techniques.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness 4. Present ideas and findings effectively. 5. Think critically and creatively. 6. Learn independently.
Contribution of Programme Outcomes: the Subject to the Attainment of the Category A: Professional/academic knowledge and skills Programme • Programme Outcomes 2, 5: This subject contributes to the programme Outcomes outcome through the teaching of the knowledge of image and audio processing and through providing the students with an opportunity to apply their knowledge. • Programme Outcomes 3, 6: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing the opportunity for students to solve practical engineering problems pertaining to the field of image and audio processing. • Programme Outcome 4: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing students with laboratory exercises to process and analyze images and audios.
Category B: Attributes for all-roundedness • Programme Outcomes 9, 12: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing students with an opportunity to practice working in a team. • Programme Outcome 10: This subject contributes to the programme outcome by providing students with an opportunity to think critically about and practice the different image/audio processing techniques for different applications.
Subject Synopsis/ Syllabus: Indicative Syllabus 1. Image processing 1.1 Fundamentals of digital image: Digital image representation and visual perception, image sampling and quantization. 1.2 Image enhancement: Histogram processing; Median filtering; Low-pass 237 filtering; High-pass filtering; Spatial filtering; Linear interpolation, Zooming. 1.3 Image coding and compression techniques: Scalar and vector quantizations; Codeword assignment; Entropy coding; Transform image coding; Wavelet coding; Codec examples. 1.4 Image analysis and segmentation: Feature extraction; Histogram; Edge detection; Thresholding. 1.5 Image representation and description: Boundary descriptor; Chaincode; Fourier descriptor; Skeletonizing; Texture descriptor; Moments.
2. Audio processing 2.1 Fundamentals of digital audio: Sampling; Dithering; Quantization; psychoacoustic model. 2.2 Basic digital audio processing techniques: Anti-aliasing filtering; Oversampling; Analog-to-digital conversion; Dithering; Noise shaping; Digital-to-analog Conversion; Equalisation. 2.3 Digital Audio compression: Critical bands; threshold of hearing; Amplitude masking; Temporal masking; Waveform coding; Perceptual coding; Coding techniques: Subband coding and Transform coding. 2.4 Case Study of Audio System/Codecs: MP3; MP3-Pro; CD; MD; DVD- Audio; AC-3; Dolby digital; Surround; SRS Surround system; Digital Audio Broadcasting, etc.
Laboratory Experiments:
1. Image processing techniques 2. Image compression 3. Audio compression 4. Psychoacoustic behaviour
Teaching/ Teaching Intended Remarks Learning and Subject Methodology Learning Learning Method Outcome Lectures 1, 2, 3 Fundamental principles and key concepts of the subject are delivered to students. Tutorials 2, 3, 5 These are supplementary to lectures and are conducted with smaller class sizes; students will be able to clarify concepts and to gain a deeper understanding of the lecture material; problems and application examples are given and discussed. Laboratory 4, 5 Students will make use of software to simulate the sessions various theories and visualize the results.
238
Alignment of Assessment and Specific Assessment % Intended Subject Learning Intended Subject Methods/Tasks Weighting Outcomes to be Assessed Learning (Please tick as appropriate) Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 1. Continuous 40%
Assessment • Short quizzes • Assignments and tests • Laboratory sessions
2. Examination 60% Total 100 %
The continuous assessment will consist of a number of assignments, laboratory reports, and two tests.
Explanation of the appropriateness of the assessment methods in
assessing the intended learning outcomes:
Specific Assessment Remark Methods/Tasks Short quizzes These can measure the students’ understanding of the theories and concepts as well as their
comprehension of subject materials. Assignments, tests and End-of chapter type problems are used to evaluate examination the students’ ability in applying concepts and skills learnt in the classroom; students need to think critically and to learn independently in order to come up with an alternative solution to an existing problem. Laboratory sessions Students are required to conduct some laboratory works, and produce the written reports; The accuracy and presentation of the report will be assessed; the emphasis is on assessing the students’ ability to apply knowledge and skills learned in lectures, and their ability to relate the taken data and results to the most relevant theory.
Student Study Class contact (time-tabled): Effort Expected • Lecture 24 Hours
• Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes 18 hours
Other student study effort:
• Lecture: preview/review of notes; 36 Hours homework/assignment; preparation for test/quizzes/examination • Tutorial/Laboratory/Practice Classes: preview of 27 Hours materials, revision and/or reports writing Total student study effort: 105 Hours
Reading List and Textbooks:
239 nd References 1. R.C. Gonzalez and R.E. Woods, Digital Image Processing, 2 ed., Prentice- Hall, 2002. 2. Ken C. Pohlmann, Principles of Digital Audio, 4th ed., McGraw-Hill, 2000.
Reference Books:
1. Ze-Nian Li and Mark S. Drew, Fundamentals of Multimedia, Pearson Prentice- Hall, 2004. 2. M. Mandal, Multimedia Signals and Systems, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2003.
240